Home

Pioneer Z110 Operation Manual

1. and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Movie Times The All Movie Theaters screen appears 3 Touch the desired tab to change the sort order Available options e Dist default Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance from the vehicle position e Name Sorts the items in the list alphabetically 4 Touch the desired theater The movie titles currently shown on the se lected theater are displayed Touch g Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when the new informa tion is received 5 Touch on the item that you want to view in detail 6 Touch OK Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Touch Call Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re quired Browsing weather information Local weather information can be displayed on a list Switching the screen allows you to see worldwide weather conditions Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates weather information the information provided may not necessarily correspond to ac tual weather conditions Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 Checking the local weather information
2. 1 Touch Bass Booster on the AV Sound Settings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch or to adjust the range from 0 to 6 Setting the simulated sound stage You can select the desired effect from various simulated sound stages such as Music Studio or Dynamic Theater You can also adjust a lis tener positioning effect Setting a stage that fits your image 1 Touch Staging on the AV Sound Set tings menu 2 Touch desired stage setting re Staging DVD V Position Actor s Stage Dynamic Theater Living Room O Living Room setting that emphasizes mid range sound hardly has any effect near the maximum volume level When you set staging to an option other than Off the high pass filter HPF setting turns Off gt For details refer to Using the high pass filter on the previous page Adjusting a position effect You can select a listener position that you want to make as the center of sound effects 1 Touch Staging on the AV Sound Set tings menu 2 Touch Position 3 Touch desired position Position DVD V sadudsajoid Hulziwio sn5 E9 Operatin Your Navi To Ensure Safe Driving A CAUTION For your safety avoid viewing the screen in the voice operation as much as possible while driving If you use voice operation select US English in Voice Language of Language
3. 2 Distance from the current position of your ve hicle to the point of entry into the new route 2 Difference in distance and travel time between the existing route and new route O There is no action if the system cannot find any traffic congestion information on your route or the system cannot find an alterna tive 74 En 1 Touch New The recommended route is displayed on the screen Touch Current The current route is displayed on the screen 2 Touch OK The displayed route is set 1 When no selection is made the screen re turns to the previous screen Checking traffic information manually Touching the notification icon on the map screen allows you to check traffic information on your route while the icon is displayed The notification icon is only displayed on the navi gation map screen if there is any traffic infor mation on your route The notification icon is not available if your vehicle deviates from the route 1 Set Show Traffic Incident to View gt For details refer to Show Traffic Incident on page 45 2 Display the map screen The icon appears when the system acquires traffic information on the current route 3 Touch the icon while the icon is dis played Traffic information on the current route is dis played on the map screen Diversion List 1 46 G aE HWY 99 ROY ST Direction SOUTHBOUND Slow traffic one J A_0 2mi 4 Touch Diversion
4. ROM com pressed audio file DivX DivX video files O This touch panel key appears only when playing a disc containing a mixture of various media Tile types 3 Skip the track forward or backward Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next track Touching ka once skips to the start of the current track Touching it again will skip to the previous track Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold ka or gt gt to fast reverse or fast forward O Fast reverse stops when it reaches the beginning of the first file on the repeat range O In the case of compressed audio files there is no sound on fast rewind or for ward O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 4 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 6 Shuffle All 116 En ED Playing music files on ROM All of the songs in the disc can be played at random by touching only one key O Ifthe disc contains a mixture of various media file types all tracks within the current part CD or ROM are played randomly O To cancel random play switch Ran dom to Off on the Function menu Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on a disc Touch a folder on the list to view its contents You can play a track on the list by touching it 1 Touch List The contents of the folder in which the cur rently playing Til
5. 4 Touch the desired entry on the list to make a call O If the entry has multiple phone number data a selection list appears Touch Search The Contacts Name Search screen appears You can search by the names registered in the Contacts List screen Touch Delete The Delete from Contacts screen appears If you select the entry you want to delete and touch Delete a message appears If you touch OK the entry is deleted 5 Touch to end the call Making a phone call using the received call history The received call history saves 30 calls per re gistered cellular phone If the number of calls exceeds 30 the oldest entry will be deleted 1 Display the Phone Menu screen 2 Touch Received Calls The Received Calls List screen appears Received Calls List 1 1 Nancy 12 18 12 29 2008 Detail buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Using hands free phoninc 3 Touch an entry on the list Detailed Information Dialing starts Nancy O To cancel the call after the system starts dialing touch fm Touch Detail The Detailed Information screen appears 01234567890 s Detailed Information Nancy You can check the details of the party before mak ing a phone call 01234567890 4 Touch f to end the call Making a phone call using You can check the details of the party before mak missed call history ing a phone call The missed call his
6. Appendix Appendix OGG Message Cause Action Reference Cannot play back all tracks All the files on the inserted external Store playable files storage device are secured by DRM All of the files cannot be played by Replace it with the playable file Page 199 this unit USB flash drive was discon The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB nected for device protection short circuited cable is not caught in something or da Do not connect this USB flash maged drive to the unit To restart j The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do USB restart the unit consumes more than 500 mA maxi not use it Turn the ignition switch to OFF mum allowable current then to ACC or ON and then connect the compliant USB storage device The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or short circuited USB cable is not caught in something or da maged Authorization failure iPod is The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version not connected navigation system Communication failure e Disconnect the cable from iPod Once iPod main menu is displayed connect the cable again e If the message appears frequently consult your dealer iPod VR Dictionary being cre iPod function is restricted because Wait on the iPod basic screen Music until gt ated Please wait the navigation system is tr
7. Favorites screen appears 3 Touch Delete The Delete from Favorites screen appears Delete from Favorites HOME E PUSA E MY PARENTS fe MY SISTER E MY BROTHER MY OFFICE 4 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion Delete from Favorites HOME E PUSA E MY PARENTS fe MY SISTER E MY BROTHER MY OFFICE Touch All Selects all entries Touch None Chapter suo1 2e90 Huljipa pue Hulsa sibay Ki Re yistering and editin Displayed when all locations are selected Can cels all selected locations 5 Touch Delete A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion Address Book Delete HOME Are you sure you want to delete Yes No N EA My parents I Delete 6 Touch Yes The data you selected is deleted Touch No Cancels the deletion J Exporting and importing the entry in Favorites Exporting the entry in Favorites Exporting the Favorites data to an SD mem ory card for editing is possible by using the uti lity program AVIC FEEDS which is available separately on your PC O If there is a previous data in the SD mem ory card the data is overwritten with new data when current data is exported 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD me
8. Play genres gt Displays the genre list gt Say the genre that you want to play Play the genre lt Genre name gt Starts playback from the top of the selected genre Browse artists gt Displays the artist list together with sub screen to continue the voice operation gt Say the desired voice commands Browse the artist lt Artist name gt Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub screen to con tinue the voice operation Say the desired voice commands Browse albums Displays the album list together with sub screen to continue the voice operation gt Say the de sired voice commands Browse the album lt Album name gt Displays the song list of the selected aloum together with sub screen to con tinue the voice operation gt Say the desired voice commands Browse playlists gt Displays the playlist together with sub screen to continue the voice operation Say the desired voice commands Browse the playlist lt Playlist name gt Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub screen to continue the voice operation Say the desired voice commands Browse genre Displays the genre list together with sub screen to continue the voice operation Say the desired voice commands Browse the genre lt Genre name gt Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub screen to con tinue the voice operation gt
9. O sec Playing by selecting from the title list You can select and play the title you want from the list 1 Touch List on the playback screen 2 Touch the title to play from the list Me 5 32 00 35 Origina BL lt CM Skip f CM Skip amp Se ae ee 03 2009 4 12 PM 8 18 57 Mode Change f TES T T02 2009 4 12 PM 8 18 50 be SEA bacithtinabias 04 2009 4 12 PM 8 19 2 bay ae i 44 I 05 2009 4 12 PM 8 19 8 i 1406 2009 4 12 PM 8 19 13 07 2009 4 12 PM 8 19 18 O Touching J or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list 3 To return to the previous screen touch List Frame by frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback Touch I gt during playback Each time you touch II you move ahead one frame To return to normal playback touch gt H O With some discs images may be unclear during frame by frame playback Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed 1 Touch and hold I gt until 1 is dis played during playback The icon up is displayed and forward slow motion playback begins O To return to normal playback touch gt H 2 Touch lt i or gt to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback Each time you touch dll or IIb it changes the speed in four steps in the following order 1 16 gt 1 8 gt 1 4 gt 1 2 There is no sound during slow motion play bac
10. S SSC lt 7 e The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10000 hours However it may decrease if used in high temperatures e Ifthe LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime the screen will become dimmer and the image will no longer be visible In that case please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station m 206 En Appendix Appendix OS Display information Destination Menu Phone Menu Phone Menu Destination Menu My Phone IN AVIC FEEDS Ske Address MH Favorites Fs oO Return Home POI Dial Pad Call Home msn Direct Cancel Route History Dialed Calls Received Calls Coordinates Route Overview S Address 57 Dial Pad Return Home 59 Call Home POI Contacts Gas Station Contacts Transfer ATM Received Calls 60 Coffee Dialed Calls Hotel Missed Calls Spell Name 60 GOOG 411 Near Me 60 N Destinati 1 Near Destination 6 Setti ngs Menu Around City 61 il Settings Menu AVIC FEEDS 62 mee p ap e ye ie Favorites 61 64 f amp f TE Navi Settings rae History 62 67 oa Cancel Route 56 ot f Bluetooth 7 Map Settings tose MSN Direct 68 Settings S Coordinates 62 Route Overview 54 Navi Settings System Settings AV Settings AV Sound Map Settings Bluetooth Settings Setting Replicator Contacts Missed Calls
11. USE 1 Start the engine to boot up the system After a short pause the splash screen comes on for a few seconds 2 Touch the language that you want to use on the screen i Select Program Language Francais Espa ol 3 Touch the language that you want to Regular startup use for the voice guidance Start the engine to boot up the system T Voice Language Selection After a short pause the splash screen comes on for a few seconds The screen shown will differ depending on the previous conditions When there is no route the disclaimer ap pears after the navigation system reboots Read the disclaimer carefully checking its details and then touch OK if you agree to the conditions O Ifthe anti theft function is activated you must enter your password Read the disclaimer carefully checking its details and then touch OK if you agree to the conditions Francais Espanol US English Samantha TTS Francais Virginie TTS Espa ol Monica TTS The navigation system will now restart 34 En Chapter Basic operation 02 uol e1ado diseg Chapter How to use the navigation menu screens Screen switching overview Destination Menu Phone Menu My Phone A Return Home a v Direct Dial Pad Call Home Contacts History Cancel Route ceived Calls Dialed Calls Missed Calls Coordinates AV Source Contacts Transfer w Bluetooth 4 ic GOOG 411 S A
12. gt gt skips to the start of the next track Touching ke once skips to the start of the current track Touching it again will skip to the previous track Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold ka or gt gt to fast reverse or fast forward O Fast reverse stops when it reaches the beginning of the first track on the disc O You can also perform these operations by using TRK lt gt button 4 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause Shuffle All All of the songs in the disc can be played at random by touching only one key O To cancel random play switch Ran dom to Off on the Function menu Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles on a disc and select one of them to play 1 Touch List 2 Touch the track you want to play Pioneer Time 01 Pioneer Time 02 Pioneer Time 03 aa gt Il gt gt Pioneer Time 04 Pioneer Time 05 Shuffle All Pioneer Time 06 Detail The track currently playing is highlighted Touching 4 or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list O The mark is displayed if there is no cor responding information 3 To return to the previous screen touch Detail 414 En Using the Function menu 1 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the CD screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switchin
13. i AV Settings iy Setting Replicator Contacts Transfer g GOOG 411 Oj AV Sound Screen Off 84 85 85 89 85 86 86 87 94 98 162 165 44 89 103 En x pu ddy 207 Appendix MD Appendx SSOOC C SSSSCC C C S System Settings menu Navi Settings menu i System Settings il Navi Settings Regional Splash Back Settings Screen Camera Connection ao Drive Lo Calibration Gas Mileage 9 Status Settings Status Screen illumi Color Service Calibration Information Modify Set Home Current Location Demo Mode S Restore Factory Settings Connection Status 94 Program Language Voice Lan 99 _ _ _ ds guage 3D Calibration Status 94 Time 99 Gas Mileage 96 km mile 100 Drive Log Settings 97 Speed 100 Demo Mode 98 Volume 100 Set Home 98 Splash Screen 101 Modify Current Location 98 Back Camera 101 Screen Calibration 102 Mumi Color 103 Service Information 103 Restore Factory Settings 178 208 En Appendix Appendix OS Map Settings menu AV System Settings menu il Map Settings o AV System Settings DivX Displayed Quick Access i Overlay POI View Mode 1 T A y Info Selection y AVi Input AV2 Input ANTCTRL Wide Mode Day Night AV Guide A Road Color Display Mode Mute Mute Level Guidance VR Catalog DivX VOD UE Menu S S Displayed Info AV 1 Input 162 Close Up View 44 AV2
14. screen appears 3 NO1 UdIIND y HulAyipow pue Hurppay gt Chapter Checking and modifying the current route Route Options m ouch No Route Condition 6 The previous screen returns without deleting the Avoid Toll Road route m Avoid Ferry Avoid Freeway Time restrictions Learning Route gt For details concerning operations refer to Modifying the route calculation conditions on page 51 8 Canceling the route guidance If you no longer need to travel to your destina tion follow the steps below to cancel the route guidance 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Cancel Route A message confirming the cancellation of the Current route appears Destination Menu Ye Cancel the route Yes Skip aD TISCUTY 7 Cancer ROUTE Coordinates Route Overview 3 Touch Yes The current route is deleted and a map of your surroundings reappears Touch Skip The next waypoint along the route can be skipped A new route to your destination through all re maining waypoints except for the skipped way point is calculated When the route calculation is completed Route confirmation screen appears O Skip is available only when a waypoint is set 56 En Chapter Searching for and selecting a location CH A CAUTION For safety reasons these route setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must sto
15. All Selects all traffic information Touch None Displayed when all traffic information are se lected Cancels all selected traffic information 5 Touch OK The selected traffic information icon is added to the screen 6 Touch OK Browsing local events The nearby events to be held in the next few days are displayed on a list and you can see the detail event information Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates local event information the information provided may not necessarily correspond to ac tual local event conditions Please refer to No tice about MSN Direct on page 68 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Local Events The Local Event Date screen appears Chapter Browsing information on MSN Direct dH Local Event Date All Date Today Tomorrow Day after tomorrow 3 Touch the date on which you want to check the events The Local Event Groups List screen ap pears 4 Touch the category of events that you want to check The Local Event Sub Groups List screen ap pears 5 Touch the subcategory of events that you want to check The Local Events screen appears 6 Touch the desired tab to change the sort order Available options e Dist default Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance from the vehicle position e Name Sorts the items in the list alphabetically 7 To
16. If you se lect other languages voice operation will not be available Basics of Voice Operation Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest in voice recognition technology You can use voice commands to operate many of its func tions This chapter describes where you can use voice commands and also what com mands the system accepts 0 This function is not available while the cata loging of iPod is created Flow of voice operation You can start voice operation any time even when the map screen is displayed or AV is op erating Some operations are not available The basic steps of voice operations are as follows 1 Switch the screen to map screen or AV operation screen 2 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations 3 Speak a command into the microphone after the beep 4 When the command is recognized the navigation system displays next options on the screen and pronounces it in some case S 5 Repeat previous step as necessary 170 En ation System with Voice 6 The requested operation will be carried out O The voice operation may not be operable for a minute after the navigation system has booted up O Voice operation will be activated 30 seconds after the map screen is displayed If the VOICE button does not respond display the disclaimer screen and then touch OK The map screen is displayed Starting voice operation Press the VOICE button when the map screen or
17. Intel Corp Nokia Corp Toshiba and IBM in 1998 and it is currently developed by nearly 2000 companies worldwide e The Bluetooth word mark and logos are re gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners About the SAT RADIO READY Logo GaP RADIO READY The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer i e XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately can be controlled by this naviga tion system Please inquire with your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer service station re garding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this navigation system Note The system will use direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide listeners in their cars and at home with crystal clear sound seamlessly trom coast to coast Satel lite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital quality music news sports talk and children s programming SAT Radio the SAT Radio logo and all re lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio inc and XM Satellite Radio Inc J HD Radio Technology HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio Ready logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Di gital Corporation SD and SDHC logo gt DP SD Logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC SDHC Logo is a trademar
18. Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice Next page Previous page gt Switches the page Last page First page Switches to the last or first page Voice operation for the iPod For lt Artist name gt lt Album name gt lt Play list name gt lt Genre name gt shown on the fol lowing chart say the name their name in the iPod O Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands Voice commands and operations Shuffle play Plays all songs randomly Resume Resumes the song or the video currently playing Pause Pauses the song or the video currently playing Next song Plays the next song Previous song Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing Play songs Starts playback from the top of Songs 172 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Voice commands and operations Play artists Displays the artist list gt Say the artist name that you want to play Play the artist lt Artist name gt Starts playback from the top of the selected artist Play albums Displays the album list gt Say the album name that you want to play Play the album lt Album name gt Starts playback from the top of the selected album Play playlists gt Displays the playlist gt Say the playlist that you want to play Play the playlist lt Playlist name gt Starts playback from the top of the selected playlist
19. Pashto Pushto ps 1619 Quechua qu 1721 Rhaeto Romance rm 1813 Kirundi rn 1814 Rumanian ro 1815 Kinyarwanda rw 1823 Sanskrit sa 1901 Sindhi sd 1904 Sango sg 1907 Serbo Croatian sh 1908 Singhalese si 1909 Slovak sk 1911 Slovenian sl 1912 Samoan sm 1913 Shona sn 1914 Somali so 1915 Albanian sq 1917 Serbian sr 1918 Siswati ss 1919 Sesotho st 1920 Sundanese su 1921 Swahili sw 1923 Tamil ta 2001 Telugu te 2005 Tajik tg 2007 Thai th 2008 Tigrinya ti 2009 Turkmen tk 2011 Tagalog tl 2012 Setswana tn 2014 Tongan to 2015 Turkish tr 2018 Tsonga ts 2019 Tatar tt 2020 Twi tw 2023 Ukrainian uk 2111 Urdu ur 2118 Uzbek uz 2126 Vietnamese vi 2209 Volapuk vo 2215 Wolof wo 2315 Xhosa xh 2408 Yoruba yo 2515 Zulu zu 2621 dnjzas XAIG YA GA O2ePIA GAG Chapter 23 Playing music files from USB or SD You can play the compressed audio files stored in the external storage device USB SD O In the following description the SD mem ory card and USB memory device are col lectively referred to as the external storage device USB SD If it indicates the USB memory device only it is referred to as the USB storage device Starting procedure 1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugg
20. Say the desired voice commands Play more music artist gt Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist Play more music album Plays the songs related to the currently playing album Play more music genre Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre Next page Previous page gt Displays the previous or next page of the selection list 1 First page Last page Displays the first or last page of the the selection list 1 1 The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed JIOA YRIM Wia SAs UOI EHIAeN ANOA Burzesado En 173 Chapter E9 Operatin Voice operation for AV source other than iPod Your Navigation System with Voice AV source selection Voice commands and operations Change Source to DISC Switches the AV source to Disc Change Source to FM Switches the AV source to FM Change Source to AM Switches the AV source to AM Change Source to XM Satellite Radio gt Switches the AV source to XM Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio gt Switches the AV source to SIRIUS Change Source to HD Radio gt Switches the AV source to Digital Radio Change Source to SD Media Switches the AV source to SD Change Source to USB Switches the AV source to USB Change Source to iPod Switches the AV source to iPod Change Source to Bluetooth Audio Switches the AV source to Bluetooth Audio Built in DVD drive external st
21. Setting the time difference Adjusts the system s clock Set the time differ ence from the time originally set in your navigation system 1 Display the Regional Settings screen 2 Touch Time The Time Settings screen appears l Time Settings Summer Time Time format 3 To set the time difference touch or The time difference between the time origin ally set in the navigation system Pacific Stan dard Time and the current location of your vehicle is shown If necessary adjust the time difference Touching or changes the time difference display in one hour incre ments The time difference can be set from 4 to 9 hours 4 Touch Summer Time If necessary set to Summer time saduasajaid Hulziwioj snD Chapter ED Customizing preferences Summer time setting is off by default Touch Summer Time to change the setting if you are in the summer time period 5 Touch Time format Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e 12H default Changes the display to 12 hour format with am pm e 24H Changes the display to 24 hour format Changing the unit between km and miles This setting controls the unit of distance and speed displayed on your navigation system 1 Display the Regional Settings screen 2 Touch km mile A message contirming whether to change the setting appears 3 Touch Yes It changes the settings as follows
22. The beginning of the first Disc Scan audio files of each folder is played for about 10 seconds The beginning of each file in Folder Scan the current folder is played for about 10 seconds gt For more information refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 6 File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track Current time 9 File number indicator Shows the number of the file and the total number of files in the repeat range Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing when available O Ifthe title of a track is not available the file name appears d Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing when available 2 Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track when available J INOW UO sayy Disnu Bured Using the touch panel keys m 01 01 MP3 Zn Current ROOT Now Playing 01 06 Q a Disc Repeat A Go straight mp3 AVIC Navigation Shuffle All List Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on this page 2 Switch the media file type played When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch be tween media file types to play Touch Media repeatedly to switch between the following media file types CD audio data CD DA
23. This Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software The Agreement also will termi nate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement Upon such ter mination you agree to destroy the Software 6 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agreement This Agreement shall be gov erned by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of Canada applicable therein If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable the remain ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect uoIpnpo u Chapter KD Introduction Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT THE AGREE MENT BETWEEN YOU THE END USER AND TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA INC Tele Atlas BYUSING YOUR COPY OP THE TELE ATLAS DATA YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 Grant of License Tele Atlas grants you a non transferable non exclusive license to use the map data and business points of interest information the POIs together the Data contained on these discs solely for personal non commer cial use and not to operate a service
24. and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user s right to operate the equipment FCC ID AJDK026 IC 775E K026 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including inter ference that may cause undesired operation of this device MADE IN THAILAND For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 This transmitter must not be co located or op erated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency RF Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without uoIpnpo u maximum permissive exposure evaluation MPE But it is desirable that it should be in stalled and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person s body excluding extremities hands wrists feet and ankles CAUTION USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADI
25. available Red Random play Repeat play Chapter Using the Bluetooth audio player 26 Indicator Meaning Using the Function menu All Repeat All audio files in the current O This menu is available only when the con _ Bluetooth audio player are nected Bluetooth audio player features All Repeat Ran played repeatedly This is the AVRCP 1 3 dom default condition 1 Touch Bluetooth Audio on the AV Track Repeat n The current file is played re source meng to display the Track Repeat peatedly Bluetooth Audio screen Random gt For details concerning operations refer to Mi Suda tiee inthe caren Screen switching overview on page 36 Random Bluetooth audio player are 2 T ouch played in random order ES gt For more information refer to Using the Function Function menu on this page O In the following cases track information will only be displayed after a track starts or resumes playing You connect the Bluetooth audio player compatible with AVRCP1 3 and operate the player to start playing You select another track when playback is paused m Repeat Random J ejd opne y 003 NJg Y Huisp Repeating play Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e All Repeats all compressed audio files in the Bluetooth audio player e Track Repeats just the current track Off Does not repeat O If you skip the file forward or back
26. channel 2 Touch and hold Traffic for two sec onds or more That Instant Traffic amp Weather channel will be memorized O Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner together only one station can be memorized The station memorized after ward will overwrite the existing one Chapter Setting the memorized songs Selecting the songs to alert The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix Function MyMix list is displayed You can change the notification setting when the song is broadcast again You can enable or disable notification for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch the song title that you want to disable notification for The check mark is removed and the notifica tion setting of the song is deactivated Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable alerts for all items at the same time This function is useful when you want to turn alerts off temporarily without changing each memorized song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Alert Touch to toggle the selection Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs from the song title list 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch and hold the song you want to delete O To delete all songs that are memorized touch Delete All 3 Touch Yes 152 En Chapter Using the SIRIUS tuner 28 You can use the navigation system to control a Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner which is sold separate
27. e A j LA US 101 S Santa Ana Fwy Street View Echo Park Ave 4 Cerro Gordo St 22 m Y W Sunset Blvd Rear View 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch View Mode The View Mode screen appears 3 Touch the type that you want to set You can select the following types 48 En 2D View default Displays the 2D map screen 3D View Displays the 3D map screen Street View Displays the Street View screen O This mode is available when the route is set Rear View Displays the rear view images O This mode is available when Camera is set to On gt For details refer to Setting for rear view camera on page 101 Setting the map color change between day and night To improve the visibility of the map during the evening you can set the timing for changing the combination of the map color 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch Day Night Display Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e Automatic default You can change the colors of a map be tween daytime and nighttime according to whether the vehicle lights are On or Off e Day The map is always displayed with daytime colors O To use this function with Automatic the Orange white lead of the navigation system must be connected correctly m Changing the road color You can set the road color to bluish or reddish 1 Display the Map Settings scre
28. game Semi Pilly eter ISO9660 level 2 ee Weir Romeo and Joliet Romeo Joliet and UDF 1 02 Maximum number of folders Media co n aw SD memory card Maximum number of ace files Playable file types MP3 WMA AAC DivX vi AAC WAV AVI WMV Notes Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device USB SD 7 5 h 450 minutes MP3 compatibility Media CD R RW DVD R RW R USB storage de DL vice Pesman e 3 kops to 320 Kbps CBR VBR Sampling frequency ee Seay i SOeSiZ 8 kHz to 48 kHz ID3 tag ID3 Tag Ver 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 IDS Tag Ver 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Notes e Ver 2 x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver 1 x and Ver 2 x exist e The navigation system is not compatible with the following MP3i MP3 interactive mp3 PRO m3u playlist SD memory card xipusddy WMA compatibility ie R RW R USB storage de Media CD R RW vice SD memory card File extension Bit rate 5 kbps to 320 kbps CBR VBR Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Note The navigation system is not compatible with the following Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Lossless Voice Appendix MD Appendx SSC lt 73EPTSCS lt CS S WAV compatibility DVD R RW R USB storage de DL ice SD memory card Media CD R RW Format Linear PCM LPCM IMA ADPCM WAV files on the CD R RW DVD R RW R LPCM 16 kHz to 48 kHz Sampling frequency DL cannot be played IMA A
29. gt For details refer to Registering a location by scroll mode on page 64 e J Vicinity Search Find POls Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor gt For details refer to Searching for a nearby PO on page 60 iJ Overlay POI Displays icon for surrounding facilities POI on the map gt For details refer to Displaying POI on the map on page 46 W Volume Displays the Volume Settings screen For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 100 e W Contacts Displays the Contacts List screen gt For details refer to Calling a number in the Contacts List on page 85 e I Whole Route Overview Displays the entire route currently set gt For details refer to Chapter 7 e B Stock Info Displays stock prices gt For details refer to Browsing stock quotes on page 78 e H Traffic On Route Displays a list of traffic information on the route gt For details refer to Checking traffic infor mation on the route on page 73 e J Traffic Events Displays a list of traffic events information gt For details refer to Viewing the traffic event on page 72 e B Day Night Display Switches Day Night Display setting gt For details refer to Setting the map color change between day and night on the previous page Favorites Icon Switches Favorites Icon setting gt For details refer to Setting the Favorites icon disp
30. gt For details concerning operations refer to B gt Screen switching overview on page 36 Amo inm 101 7 mz lt Seek a 3 Q Band C O Reading the screen Preset a Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the 101 7 MHz Function menu on the next page a ee 2 Select a preset channel lt 4 or gt can be used to switch preset chan nels lt Seek gt 3 Perform manual tuning To tune manually touch lt 4 or gt briefly The frequencies move up or down one step at a time Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning touch and hold lt or gt for about one second and release The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is Band Preset Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to FM3 3 Signal level indicator found 4 Preset number indicator You can cancel seek tuning by touching Shows what preset item has been selected either lt or gt briefly Frequency indicator T If you touch and hold lt or gt you 6 Current time D Program service name indicator Shows the program service name station name of the current station can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tuning will start as Soon as you re lease the keys O You can also perform these operations LOCAL indicator Eas by using the TRK lt gt button Show
31. is set to iPod following functions are available from this navigation system e Playback and Pause e Fast reverse or forward e Skip forward or backward e Adjusting the volume Starting the video playback This navigation system can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected 1 Touch Video 2 Touch one of the categories in that con tains the video you want to play 2 14 Music Video Playlists Movies Music Videos TV Shows Video Podcasts Video playback will start 3 Touch your desired item on the list to narrow down them until the video list ap pears gt For details concerning operations refer to Browsing for a video on the next page Chapter Using an iPod iPod 25 4 On the video list touch the video you want to play 5 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys gt For more details of the operation refer to Using the touch panel keys Video on this page Using the touch panel keys Video Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 2 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files After you touch the key the top category menu appears to let you se lect the item for playback O This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video file in your iPod 3 Display
32. mands It may take a short period of time to transfer the information Change the setting according to your usage The navigation system starts acquiring catalo ging music information 1 when the iPod is connected or when the system boots up while the iPod is connected and 2 when iPod is the selected and displayed AV Source unless VR Catalog Mode is turned off This function is available when Change Control Mode is set to Navi If you do not use iPod this setting is un necessary O During transfer iPod operations Such as Shuffle MENU or Video are not available Chapter Customizing preferences 32 O Once the cataloging is completed you can deactivate VR Catalog Menu until you update the content data on iPod If you up date the iPod data activate VR Catalog Menu again to transfer the music informa tion and synchronize the music information for voice commands with the data on iPod O After you select Off in VR Catalog Mode the system doesn t catalog the data on the iPod In such case the pre viously cataloged data are available as voice commands O Once you start the cataloging process only a few basic voice commands can be used for iPod until the process has completely finished O If unreadable characters are included in the data on your iPod names or types may not be available as voice commands Important Notice regarding Voice Control for iPods Voice Control for i
33. methods for selecting and listing the chan nel ALL CH MODE You can select a channel from all channels when you operate this function CATEGORY MODE You can select a channel within a selected category that you operate this function Selecting an XM channel directly gt For details refer to Selecting an XM chan nel directly on this page Switching to the list display You can select the desired channel from the list display gt For details refer to Se ecting a channel from the list on the next page Switching the channel category Touch lt 4 or gt to select the desired cate gory 43UN WX 34 Buisn Selecting an XM channel directly You can select an XM channel directly by en tering the desired channel number 1 Touch Direct 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired channel number To cancel the input numbers touch KE 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter The XM channel that was entered is selected 4 Touch K You return to the previous display Displaying the Radio ID If you select CH 000 the Radio ID is dis played 1 Touch Direct Chapter 2 Input 000 and then touch Enter If you select another channel display of the Radio ID is canceled Storing and recalling broadcast stations With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 you can easily store up to six broadcast channels for later recall also with the touch of a key 1 Select t
34. want to play Using the Function menu 1 If Change Control Mode is set to iPod only the setting of Change Control Mode is available 1 Touch iPod on the AV Source menu to display the control screen for iPod gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 144 En Repeat Shuffle Audio Book Change Link Artists Link Albums Link Genre Control Mode 4 Setting repeat play There are two repeat play types for play back Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e One Repeats just the current track e All Repeats all tracks in the selected list 2 Setting the shuffle play for music This function shuffles songs or albums and plays them in random order Each touch of Shuffle changes the setting as follows e Off Does not shuffle e Songs Plays back songs in random order within the selected list e Albums Selects an album randomly and then plays back all songs in that album in order 3 Setting the audiobook play speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod playback speed can be changed Each touch of Audio Book changes the setting as follows e Normal Playback in normal speed e Faster Playback faster than normal speed e Slower Playback slower than normal speed Playback video in wide screen mode If the video is compatible with wide screen format set Widescreen to O
35. 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Weather The local weather information is displayed 341d NSIN UO uonewozu Bulsmoig Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct Local Weather w s Seattle a Q Bellevue Lynnwood ws oa Auburn Tacoma Olympia The city name weather temperature and wind direction are displayed in list format 3 Touch the desired area Detailed information is displayed Olympia a amp Precip 4 Cloudy Temp 16 Humidity 33 Wind SSE 7 km h Pressure 3020 in Forecast Touching Forecast displays the weather fore casts for these three days Checking worldwide weather conditions 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Weather The local weather information is displayed 3 Touch Worldwide Worldwide weather conditions are displayed The area names and weather conditions are displayed on the list The list is sorted alphabe tically by the area name 4 Touch the desired area Detailed information is displayed 72 En Using traffic information You can view current traffic conditions and in formation When the navigation system re ceives updated traffic information it will overlay the traffic information on your map and also display detailed text information when available In the default setting the navigation system takes into account traffic i
36. 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LI CENSOR S for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be col lectively referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT WARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX PRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN TIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The Software is complex and may contain some nonconformities detects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft ware will meet your needs or expectations that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pioneer does not make any representations or warran ties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy reliability or otherwise Chapter Introduction cH 3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS IN CURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM TATION COMPENSATORY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST INCOME LOST SALES OR BUSINESS EXPEN DITURES INVESTMENTS OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAMAGES RESULT ING FROM
37. 73 3 gt PETSCS Symptom Cause Action Reference No sounds are produced The volume level will not rise Cables are not connected correctly Connect the cables correctly The system is performing still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD Video The system is paused or performing For the media other than music CD CD DA There is no sound during still slow motion or frame by frame playback with DVD Video fast reverse or forward during the disc playback The icon O is displayed and op The operation is not compatible eration is not possible with the video configuration The picture stops pauses and The reading of data is impossible the navigation system cannot be during disc playback operated The picture is stretched with in The aspect setting is incorrect for correct aspect ratio the display A parental lock message is dis Parental lock is on played and DVD playback is not possible Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect cannot be canceled Playback is not with the audio The DVD playing does not feature language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language settings selected in DVD selected in DVD DivX Setup DivX Setup The picture is extremely unclear The disc features a signal to prohibit distorted and dark during play back copying Some discs may have this iPod cannot be operated The iPod is frozen An error has
38. Current ROOT Pioneer Time 01 wma WMA Mer 13 18 00 10 Video Pioneer Time 02 wma Pioneer Time 03 wma Pioneer Time 04 wma Pioneer Time 05 wma Pioneer Time 06 wma Detail The track currently playing is highlighted Touching 4 or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list Touching displays the content of the upper folder parent folder If the uppermost folder is listed E cannot be used as 10 gsn WodJ sayly D1snw HulAeld En 135 Chapter 23 Playing music files from USB or SD 3 Touch the track you want to play Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds O To cancel the list screen touch Detail of each track Scan play is performed in the Current repeat play range Touching Scan switches between On Using the Function menu and Off When you find the track you want touch Scan to turn scan play off 1 Touch USB or SD on the AV Source O After all tracks or folders scanning are menu to display the USB or SD screen finished normal playback will begin For details concerning operations refer to again Screen switching overview on page 36 a Ifyou turn Sean to On while the re peat play range is set to Track the re peat play range changes to Folder i automatically m uss Function 2 Touch EY Repeat Random M Repeating play Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e
39. Menu screen 2 Touch History The Destination History List screen ap pears Ms Destination History List HOME PUSA MY OFFICE MY BROTHER MY SISTER MY PARENTS 3 Touch the entry you want The searched location appears on the map screen m Searching for a location by coordinates Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints the location 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Coordinates The Coordinate Input screen appears Chapter Searching for and selecting a location CH Longitude 3 Touch East or West and then enter the longitude To enter W 50 1 2 5 for example touch West 0 5 0 0 1 0 2 and 5 4 Touch North or South and then enter the latitude To enter N 5 1 2 5 for example touch North O 5 0 1 0 2 and 9 5 Touch OK The searched location appears on the map screen UO1 2I0 e Hul Da 9S pue 10 Hurydieas Chapter Ki Re yistering and editin Registering a location into Favorites Registering a location by Favorites Favorites can store up to 400 registered loca tions These can include your home location favorite places and destinations you have al ready registered 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 3 Touch Add The Select Search method screen appears 4 Search for a
40. P Top Menu 140 En 25 Using an iPod iPod Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Chapter number indicator Shows the current chapter number and total number of chapters when the file with chap ters played 3 Song number indicator Shows the number of the song currently play ing and total number of songs in the selected list 4 Shuffle play indicator Appears when shuffle play is activated Repeat play indicator Appears when repeat play is activated All tracks repeat Fe One track repeat 6 Current time D Album artwork Album art of the current song is displayed if it is available Song title episode indicator Shows the title of the current song When a podcast is played the episode is displayed Artist name podcast title indicator Shows the artist name currently playing When a podcast is played the podcast title is displayed Album title release date indicator Shows the title of the album for the song When a podcast is played the release date is displayed di Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current song O lf characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this navigation system they may turn into garbled characters m Chapter Using an iPod iPod 25 Using the touch panel keys Music Now Playing 2201 10 01 08 D Destination AVIC Navigation system 00 01 Album artwork Touch the key to e
41. POls i to create mailing lists or ii for other such si milar uses b Compliance You will use the POls in compliance with all applicable federal state and local laws rules and regulations c ndemnification You shall indemnity and hold infoUSA Inc harmless against all third party claims or liability which are based in whole or in part of the users failure to comply with such laws rules and regulations or which result from the use of the POIs through you d Warranty uoIpnpo u In addition to the Warranties contained in the Agreement YOU UNDERSTAND THAT THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES MADE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE e POls Segregation You are prohibited from combining or mer ging the POls with any other POI data The POls shall be maintained in such a way that they are separately identifiable from all other POI data at all times 9 Agreement in English The parties hereto contirm that they have re quested that this Agreement and all attach ments and related documents be drafted in English Les parties ont exig que le pr sent contrat et tous les documents attach s soient r dig s en Anglais 10 Miscellaneous This is the exclusive and complete Agreement between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub ject matter
42. Playing a DVD Video 19 1 Touch A V lt or gt to select the O To return to normal playback touch gt H desired menu item 2 Touch lt i or gt to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback Each time you touch dll or IIb it changes A m the speed in four steps in the following order 1 16 lt gt 1 8 lt gt 1 4 lt gt 1 2 O There is no sound during slow motion play a back ae 1 With some discs images may be unclear eS during slow motion playback Ifthe touch panel keys for DVD menu selec g ee Slow motion playback is not possi e tion disappear touching anywhere on the screen then touching EEJ displays them again u x lt Using the Function menu 5 2 Touch Enter P Playback starts from the selected menu item 1 Touch Disc on ne AV Source menu o The way to display the menu differs depending to display the DVD V screen Z on the disc For details concerning operations refer to 0 Touch Position Screen switching overview on page 36 lt Each touch of Position changes the display po 2 Touch the screen to display the touch sition of touch panel keys i panel keys Touch Hide The touch panel keys are hidden 3 Touch EY And RBM is displayed so you can select a menu item by touching the screen o Pe Repeat L R Select DVD DivxX Setup Frame by frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during play
43. THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PLONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON TRACT BREACH OF WARRANTY NEGLI GENCE STRICT LIABILITY MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS IF POONEER S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE YOU AGREE THAT PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT 60 OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO DUCT Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim itation of incidental or consequential da mages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be applic able to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or preempted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer nor the direct product thereof will be exported outside the United States except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States If the Soft ware has been rightfully obtained by you out side of the United States you ag
44. The same setting is automatically applied for the following grouping e DVD V DVD VR DivX e EXT1 and EXT2 e AV1 and AV2 e iPod O When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original as pect ratio it may look strange O Remember that use of this system for com mercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author s rights protected by the Copyright Law O The navigation map and the rear view cam era picture is always viewed at Full Setting the rear output The navigation system s rear output can be used for a Tull range speaker or Subwoofer connection If you switch Rear SP to Sub W you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp Initially the navigation system is set for a rear full range speaker connection Full Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting When you use the product without RCA rear output this setting only applies to the rear speaker leads Ol Rear SP can be set only when the source is selected to Off 1 Touch Rear SP on the AV System Set tings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sys tem Settings menu on the previous page 2 Touch Rear SP to switch the rear out put setting When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output select Full When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output sel
45. Touch All Movie Titles The movie titles now showing are displayed Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when the new informa tion is received 4 Touch the desired movie title The theaters that are currently showing the se lected movie are displayed Movie Theater Name _ Lincoln Square Cinemas Kirkland Parkplace Cinema Bainbridge Cinemas at the Pavilion AMC Loews Factoria 8 SBS amp amp B amp B Regal Crossroads Stadium 8 Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when the new informa tion is received 5 Touch the desired tab to change the sort order Available options e Dist default Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance trom the vehicle position Chapter Browsing information on MSN Direct dH e Name Sorts the items in the list alphabetically 6 Touch on the item that you want to view in detail Touch Qj Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 7 Touch OK Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Touch Call Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re quired Searching for a movie title by selecting a theater 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu
46. Touch the key next to Country to se lect the country If the destination is in another country this changes the country setting O Once the country has been selected you only have to change countries when your destination is outside of the country you se lected 4 Touch the key next to State and touch the desired state province or terri tory on the list If the location that you want to search for is in another state province or territory this changes the area setting O Once the state province or territory has been selected you only have to change states provinces or territories when your destination is outside of the state province or territory you selected Searching for a city name first O Depending on the search results some steps may be skipped 1 Display the Address Search screen 2 Touch City The Enter City Name screen appears UO1 LI0 e Hul Da 9S pue 10 Hurydieas En 57 Chapter KD Searching for and selecting a location Street City Enter City Name 3 Enter the city name and then touch OK The Select City screen appears 4 Touch the desired city name The Street Name screen appears ant AraAmnara CITY Aramore Street Street Name Touch Qj The representative location of the city appears on the map screen 5 Enter the street name and then touch OK The Street Selection screen appears 6 Touch the de
47. as that indicated back on page 121 gt For details refer to Slow motion playback Resuming playback Bookmark on page 121 2 Fast reverse or forward The Bookmark function lets you resume play Touch lt or gt to perform fast reverse or back from a selected scene the next time the forward disc is loaded If you touch and hold lt lt or gt gt for five seconds fast reverse fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys To re sume playback at a desired point touch Chapter EET Playing a DVD Video Touching BookM You can bookmark one point for each of up to five discs If you try to memorize another point for the same disc the oldest bookmark will be overwritten by the newest one O To clear the bookmark on a disc touch and hold BookM Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for the scene you want by spe cifying a title or a chapter and the time O Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch Search and then touch Title title Chapter chapter Time time Title Search DVD V S Title Chapter Time 10Key 2 Touch the keys to input the target num ber or time and then touch Enter For titles chapters e Jo select 3 touch 3 and Enter in order e Jo select 10 touch 1 and 0 and Enter in order For time time search e Jo se
48. briefly view the current status on the AV source Touching it again re tracts the bar 9 Shortcut to the AV operation screen The AV Source currently selected is shown Touching the indicator displays the AV opera tion screen of the current source directly O If you connect your iPod to this naviga tion system the artwork for the album that is playing appears Quick Access icon Displays Quick Access menu 4 Map orientation indicator e When North up is selected N is dis played e When Heading up is selected 4 is displayed O The red arrow indicates north 2 Current route The route currently set is highlighted in bright color on the map If a waypoint is set on the route the route after the next waypoint is highlighted in another color 3 Direction line The direction towards your destination next waypoint or cursor is indicated with a straight line Voice icon This icon shows when the voice operation is active 5 Bluetooth connection icon This icon shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth technology is connected or not You can select between display and non display gt For details refer to Bluetooth Con nected on page 45 Multi Info window Each touch of Multi Info window changes the display information e Distance to the destination or dis tance to waypoint e Estimated time of arrival at your des tination or waypoint 40 En EKD How to use the map The e
49. bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data of other persons or entities You may make one 1 copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes only but you may not other wise copy reproduce modify make derivative works derive the structure of or reverse engi neer the Data The Data contains confidential and proprietary information and materials and may contain trade secrets so you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions in any form including by renting leasing publish ing leasing sublicensing or transferring the Data to any third party You are prohibited from removing or obscuring any copyright tra demark notice or restrictive legend 2 Ownership The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li censors and they retain all ownership rights in the Data You agree not to alter remove oblit erate or obScure any copyright notice or pro prietary legend contained in or on the Data 3 Warranty Disclaimer THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS AND TELE ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IN CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MER C44 En CHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AC CURACY TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NO ORAL OR WRIT TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS EM PLOYEES OR THI
50. can sort the traffic information Each time you touch the key changes that set ting You can sort the traffic information by dis tance from your current position For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic Events the list will be sorted according to the linear distance from the vehicle posi tion to the traffic information For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic On Route the list will be sorted accord ing to the distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information You can sort the traffic information in alpha betical order You can sort the traffic information accord ing to the incident The list will be sorted in the order of closed blocked roads traffic congestion acci dents road works and others Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen Touch Refresh When new traffic information is received current information is changed or old information has been removed the list is updated to reflect the new situation Touch Qj Touching allows you to check the location on a map Traffic information without positional in formation cannot be checked on a map 4 Touch fy The previous screen returns Checking traffic information on the route All traffic information on the current route is displayed on screen in a list Touch Traffic On Route The Traffic On Route screen appears The method for checking the content dis played on the screen is
51. confirming whether to dial appear S 3 Say Yes Dialing starts Operating iPod by voice You can play music using voice operation from the iPod connected to the navigation system O To use the content data on the iPod for voice operation transfer the data to this system first gt For details refer to Acquirning Cataloging iPod music information on page 164 Examples of voice operation of the iPod are shown below A method for playing the album title named Pioneer is described here along with an operational example 1 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations 2 Say Change Source to display the AV source selection screen Chapter SIIOA YPM Wia SAs UOI EHIAeN ANOA Burzesado En 171 Chapter E9 Operatin 3 Say iPod on the selection screen to switch the AV source to iPod O Touching the item on the screen also en ables you to select the desired AV source Your Navigation System with Voice 4 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations 5 Say Play the album Pioneer to play back the album name Pioneer If the command is recognized properly play back starts from the first song of Pioneer Available Basic Voice Commands The navigation system can also recognize the words in the following list Basic commands Voice commands and operations Back The previous screen returns Cancel Cancels the voice operation Help
52. death demand action cost expense or claim of any kind or character including but not limited to attorney s fees arising out of or in connection with any use or possession by you of the Data 7 U S Government Rights If you are an agency department or other en tity of the United States Government or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government then use duplication reproduc tion release modification disclosure or trans fer of this commercial product and accompanying documentation is restricted in accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS 252 227 7014 a 1 JUN 1995 DOD commercial computer software definition DFARS 227 7202 1 DOD policy on commercial computer software FAR 52 227 19 JUN 1987 commercial com puter software clause for civilian agencies DFARS 252 227 7015 NOV 1995 DOD techni cal data commercial items clause FAR 52 227 14 Alternates Il and III SUN 1987 ci villan agency technical data and noncommer cial computer software clause and or FAR 12 211 and FAR 12 212 commercial item ac quisitions as applicable In case of conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions listed herein and this License the construc tion that provides greater limitations on the Government s rights shall control Contractor manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America Inc 11 Lafayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 1445 Phone 603 643 0330 The Data i
53. default or factory settings 4 Touch Yes The recorded contents are cleared 178 En ED Other functions Returning the navigation system to the default or factory settings You can return settings or recorded content to the default or factory settings There are four methods to clear user data and the situations and the cleared content are different for each method For information regarding the content that is cleared by each method see the list presented later Method 1 The battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of the navigation system is disconnected Clears almost all settings of the AV function Method 2 Touch Restore Factory Settings This clears some items in the Navi Settings menu the System Settings menu and the Bluetooth Settings menu gt For details refer to Setting items to be de feted on the next page Method 3 Touch Clear user information on the Select Items to Reset screen Clears almost all settings and user data of the navigation function and the phone function gt For details refer to Setting items to be de leted on the next page Method 4 Touch Reset on the Select Items to Reset screen Clears almost all settings and user data of the navigation function and the phone function gt For details refer to Setting items to be de feted on the next page Chapter Other functions 34 Setting items to be deleted The
54. following situation When the 3D map screen is displayed 1 Display the map screen 2 Touch B on the map screen EJ o appears Y Wist St 3 Touch or to switch the vehicle s direction Each time you touch the key changes that set ting O If you do not operate the function for a few seconds the initial map screen automati cally returns Scrolling the map to the position you want to see 1 Display the map screen 42 En EKD How to use the map 2 Touch and drag the map in the desired direction to scroll Los Angeles Cursor 2 Distance from the current position Positioning the cursor to the desired location results in a brief informational overview about the location being displayed at the bottom of screen with street name and other informa tion for this location being shown The infor mation shown varies depending on the position O The scrolling increment depends on your dragging length Touch EN The map returns to the current position O Pressing MODE button returns the map to the current position Quick Access Quick Access allow you to perform various tasks such as route calculation for the loca tion indicated by the scroll cursor or register ing a location in Favorites faster than using the navigation menu You can customize Quick Access displayed on screen The Quick Access described here are prepared as the default setting gt For details re
55. for each source and rear view camera 1 Press and hold the MODE button Press and hold to display the Picture Adjust ment screen i Picture Adjustment Brightness Contrast Color Color Temp Dimmer Camera e Brightness Adjusts the black intensity e Contrast Adjusts the contrast e Color Adjusts the color saturation e Color Temp Adjusts the tone of color red is emphasized or green is emphasized e Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of dis play e Camera Shows the picture adjustment display for the rear view camera O Touching Source while adjusting the rear view camera image returns you to the pre vious screen Chapter Other functions 31 O The adjustments of Brightness and Contrast are stored separately when your vehicle s headlights are off daytime and when your vehicle s headlights are on nighttime These are switched automati cally depending on whether the vehicle s headlights are on or off O The adjustments of Dimmer is stored sepa rately when your vehicle s headlights are off daytime and when your vehicle s head lights are on nighttime Dimmer is switched automatically only when the value of nighttime is lower than the value of day time You cannot adjust Color for the source without a video and navigation map display The setting contents can be memorized se parately for the following screen and the Video image AM FM CD ROM iPod M
56. from DivX com DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video including DivX 6 Favorites A frequently visited location Such as your workplace or a relative s home that you can register to allow easy routing GPS Global Positioning System A network of satel lites that provides navigation signals for a vari ety of purposes Guidance mode The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your destination the system automati cally switches to this mode as soon as a route has been set Guidance point These are important landmarks along your route generally intersections The next gul dance point along your route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon Home location Your registered home location xipusddy Appendix MD Appendx SSC C 73 gt PTTSTS ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track related information in an MP3 file This embedded in formation can include the track title the ar tist s name the album title the music genre the year of production comments and other data The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions Although the tags are restricted by the num ber of characters the information can be viewed when the track is played back ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for mat logic of DVD CD ROM folders and files For the I
57. in order e o select 10 touch 1 and 0 and Enter in order For time time search e Jo select 5 minutes 03 seconds touch 5 min 0 3 and Enter in order e Jo select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 1 min 0 0 and Enter in order e Jo select 100 minutes 05 seconds touch 1 0 0 5 s and Enter in order O To cancel an input number touch Clear To cancel the input numbers touch and hold Clear Chapter Playing a DVD VR disc 20 Switch the playback mode You have two methods for playing DVD VR discs Original original and Playlist play list O Titles created with DVD recorders are called original Those based on original re arranged titles are called playlist Playlists are created on DVD R RW discs Touch Mode Change to switch the play mode If the play mode is changed playback starts from the beginning of the selected play mode Using the short time skip function This function enables you to skip over your specified interval on the video playback This is useful to skip commercials on your recorded DVD VR disc To skip progressively backward or for ward touch lt CM Skip or CM Skip gt Each touch of lt CM Skip or CM Skip gt changes steps in the following order lt CM Skip b sec 15sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min O sec CM Skip gt 30 sec 1min 1 5 min 2 min 3 min b min 10min
58. is displayed When the parking brake is re leased Off is displayed 4 Power Voltage The power voltage reference value pro vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga tion system is shown If the voltage goes out of the range from 11 V to 15 V check that power cable connection is correct Illumination When the headlights or small lamps of a ve hicle are on On is displayed When the small lamps of a vehicle are off Off is dis played If the orange white lead is not con nected Off appears Back Signal When the gear lever is shifted to R the signal switches to High or Low One of these is displayed depending on the vehi cle Checking sensor learning status and driving status O The navigation system can automatically use its sensor memory based on the outer dimensions of the tires 1 Display the Navi Settings screen Chapter Customizing preferences 13 2 Touch 3D Calibration Status Clearing status A The 3D Calibration Status screen appears You can delete the learned results stored in S ECET Distance Speed Pulse or Learning Sta 5 im tus 3 D cae f 1 Touch Distance or Speed Pulse A The following message appears 4 Speed Pulse 3D Calibration Status 0 5 Learning Status A Oe ae T ee ICE T 0 Are you sure you want to reset 3 M Speed The speed detected by the navigation sys Yes No tem is indicated This indication
59. items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method The items listed in the following table return to the default or factory settings O Almost all items not listed below will be re tained However some of the items to be re turned to their default values are not listed if the setting value can be easily recovered by user such as the last map scale the last status of AV operation screen etc he setting will be retained V The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 View mode and scale settingon _ the map Map function Direction of the map J J J Last cursor position on the map Q screen gt Current route WA WA J s S Guidance state of the current o Route Setting route ay Vehicle position information J J 9 Route conditions J J J a Point registered in Favorites J Destination History J All settings on MSN Direct J J J Map Settings View Mode J J MENY Other settings _ J J J 3D Calibration Status Set Home J J Navi Settings Modify Current Location J J Other settings J J J Program Language Voice E Language System Settings _ Time _ v v Back Camera J Other settings J J J En 179 Chapter ED Other functions Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2
60. map screen O You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data 1 Scroll the map and place the cursor on an icon on the map 2 Touch EJ The Detailed POI Information screen ap pears En buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Using hands free phoninc 3 Touch Call to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch fm 4 Touch f to end the call Receiving a phone call You can perform hands free answering by using the navigation system Answering an incoming call The system informs you that it is receiving a call by displaying a message and producing a ring sound lf Auto Answer Preference is set to Off answer the call manually Answering is avail able if any screen is displayed such as the map screen or the setting screen O You can set this navigation system to auto matically answer incoming calls gt For details refer to Answering a call automatically on page 90 1 When a call comes in the answering operation menu appears on the screen O The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in Contacts O Depending on the caller ID service the phone number of the received call may not be displayed Unknown appears instead 2 To answer an incoming call touch The operation menu during a call appears 88 En Close Menu m ouch Vol or Vol You ca
61. memorized tracks from the song title list 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to select the song title that you want to delete 3 Touch Delete when the song you want to delete is displayed A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 4 Touch Yes Using the Game Alert function Selecting teams for Game Alert This navigation system can alert you when games involving your favorite sports teams are about to start To use this function you need to store the teams you want to follow in advance Function sA Game Alert 1 Touch Game Alert 2 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to select the league 3 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to select the team 4 Touch On Off The team displayed as On is the alert target O When the selected team is excluded from the alert target the team is displayed as Off Up to 12 teams can be selected When you have already made 12 team se lections FULL is displayed and additional team selection is not possible In this case first delete the team selection and then try again Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for selected items This function is useful when you want to turn the alert off temporarily without chan ging the setting of each selected team 1 Touch Game Alert 2 Touch Alert O Touch to toggle the selection When a game involving one of your teams Is broadcast A message is
62. occurred 184 En there is no sound on fast reverse or forward This operation is not possible For example the DVD playing does not feature that angle audio system subtitle language etc After touching W once start playback once more Select the appropriate setting for that image Page 163 Page 130 Turn parental lock off or change the level Page 131 Input the correct code number Page 131 Switching to a selected language is not possi ble if the language selected in DVD DivX Setup is not recorded on the disc Page 130 Since the navigation system is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect sys tem the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imperfections when a disc with that kind of protection signal is viewed on some displays This does not mean the na vigation system is malfunctioning e Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod e Update the iPod software version e Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod e Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on e Update the iPod software version Appendix Appendix OGG Problems with the phone screen Symptom Cause Action Reference Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser Retry after re entering the range for
63. phone number if the phone number has been registered 1 Display the Phone Menu screen 2 Touch Call Home Dialing home starts O If you have not registered your home num ber a message appears Touch Register to start registration gt For details refer to Registering your home on page 98 Calling a number in the Contacts List After finding the entry you want to call in the Contacts List screen you can select the number and make the call O Before using this function you need to transfer the phone book entries stored in your cellular phone to the navigation sys tem gt For details refer to Transferring the phone book on page 89 1 Display the Phone Menu screen 2 Touch Contacts The Contacts List screen appears Contacts List ABCDE FGHIJ O Chris David B Ellen Frank KLMNO PQRST UVWXYZ Others O Nancy Delete Search 3 Switch the page of the list to display the desired entry If you touch an alphabet tab you can jump to the first page of the contacts whose names start with that letter Alphabet tabs Makes the screen jump to the beginning of the page including the entry whose names start with any of selected letters or numbers Touching ABCDE also displays the page in cluding the entry whose names start with pri mary symbols or numbers Touching Others displays the page including entries that are not assigned to any of the other tabs
64. receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforce able under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest va lidity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reli ance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in
65. software we are referring to free dom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are de signed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to cer tain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copy right the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library
66. some cases the route may require you to travel in the opposite direction to your current heading In such cases you are in structed to turn around so please turn around safely by following the actual traffic rules e In some cases a route may begin on the opposite side of a railway or river from your actual current location If this happens 194 En drive towards your destination for a while and try route calculation again e When there is a traffic congestion ahead a detour route may not be suggested if driv ing through the traffic congestion would still be better than taking the detour e There may be instances when the starting point the waypoint and the destination point are not on the highlighted route e The number of traffic circle exits displayed on the screen may differ from the actual number of roads Route highlighting e Once set the route is highlighted in bright color on the map e The immediate vicinity of your starting point and destination may not be high lighted and neither will areas with particu larly complex road layouts Consequently the route may appear to be cut off on the display but voice guidance will continue Auto reroute function e f you deviate from the set route the system will re calculate the route from that point so that you remain on track to the destina tion e This function may not work under certain conditions m Handling and care of discs Some basic precau
67. tab on the right edge or scroll the bar to display the icon that you want to set to shortcut 4 Touch and hold the icon that you want to add to shortcut 5 Move the icon to the left side of the screen and then release it The selected item is added to shortcut Canceling the Shortcut 1 Touch and hold the icon that you want to cancel the shortcut 2 Move the icon to the right side of the screen and then release it 38 En Displaying the rear view camera image Rear view image is displayed on the left hand side of the screen while the map of your sur roundings is indicated on the right gt For details refer to Setting for rear view camera on page 101 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch System Settings The System Settings screen appears 4 Touch Back Camera The Back Camera Settings screen appears 5 Touch Camera to turn it On Chapter How to use the map 04 Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map You need to be come familiar with how information appears on the map How to read the map screen This example shows an example of a 2D map screen O Verdugo Rd W Avenue 40 Census Tract NRN D m 16 eo f r Vy 4 r SSS AD dew y asn 0 MOH ae 2 ml D pi p Oi a Eagle Rock Blvd O
68. term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modifica tion are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any me dium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and dis tribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Libr
69. that has been received is shown The list is sorted by distance from your current position Places street names where incidents have occurred are displayed on the list 3 Select an incident you want to view in detail The details of the selected incident are dis played O Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident If the information cannot be dis played on one screen touch J or J to view the remaining information Touch Sort You can sort the traffic information Each time you touch the key changes that set ting You can sort the traffic information by dis tance from your Current position For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic Events the list will be sorted according to the linear distance from the vehicle posi tion to the traffic information For the list displayed when you touch Traf fic On Route the list will be sorted accord ing to the distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information You can sort the traffic information in alpha betical order You can sort the traffic information accord ing to the incident The list will be sorted in the order of closed blocked roads traffic congestion acci dents road works and others Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen Touch Refresh When new traffic information is received current information is changed or old information has been removed the list i
70. the phone number of the received call appears The received call history and the dialed number history e Calls made or editing performed only on your cellular phone will not be reflected to the dialed number history or phone book in the navigation system e You cannot make a call to the entry of an unknown user no phone number in the re ceived call history e If calls are made by operating your cellular phone no history data will be recorded in the navigation system Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Phone book transfers e f there are more than 1 000 phone book en tries on your cellular phone all entries may not be downloaded completely e With some cellular phones it may not be possible to transfer all items in the phone book at one time In this case transfer items one by one from your cellular phone e Depending on the cellular phone this navi gation system may not display the phone book correctly Some characters may be garbled or first and last names may be re versed e f the phone book in the cellular phone con tains image data the phone book may not be transferred correctly Image data can not be transferred from the cellular phone e Depending on the cellular phone phone book transfer may not be available buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Customizing preferences The options in the Navi Settings menu Displaying the Navi Settings screen 1 Press the HOME bu
71. the color from the preset colors 1 Display the Illumination Color screen 2 Touch the color you want Available options e Colored keys Selects the desired preset color e Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Col ors registered in the memory gt For details refer to Creating a user de fined color and storing it to memory on this page e Scan Shifts between the eight default colors in sequence gradually Creating a user defined color and storing it to memory You can create a user defined color and set it as the illumination color 1 Display the Illumination Color screen 2 Touch Custom The Illumination Color screen appears fl Illumination Color Adjustment Sil Set Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 0 If Scan is set Custom cannot be se lected saduasajaid Hulziwio snD 3 Touch or to adjust the values for Red Green and Blue to create a favorite color Watch the illumination of hardware keys while adjusting the color Each time you touch or increases or de creases the value of the selected item 31 to 00 is displayed as the value is increased or decreased O An entry cannot be stored with all of the va lues set to 00 4 Touch Memory 1 Memory 2 or Memory 3 to store the illumination color 5 Touch OK to return to the previous screen Checking the version information 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Service Informatio
72. the intersection 41 Display during freeway driving 41 Operating the map screen 41 Changing the scale of the map 41 Switching the map orientation 41 Scrolling the map to the position you wantto see 42 Quick Access 42 D Customizing the map screen settings Setting the Item on the Map Screen 44 Setting Close Up View 44 CityMap 44 Setting the switching of the city map display 44 Show Traffic Incident 45 Bluetooth Connected 45 Setting the current street name display 45 Setting the Favorites icon display 45 3D Land Mark 45 Displaying maneuvers 45 MSN Direct 46 Displaying POl onthe map 46 Displaying preinstalled POls on the map 46 Displaying the customized POls 47 Switching the view mode 47 Setting the map color change between day and night 48 Changing the road color 48 Changing the setting of navigation interruption screen 49 Selecting Quick Access 49 D Setting a route to your destination The basic flow of creating your route 50 Checking the location on the map 50 Checking the calculated route 50 Display multiple routes 51 Modifying the route calculation conditions 51 Checking the current itinerary 52 Adding a waypoint 52 D Checking and modifying the current route Checking the current itinerary 54 Editing waypoints 54 Adding a waypoint 54 Deleting a waypoint 55 Sorting waypoints 55 Modifying the route calculat
73. the previous selected list If you select the video from the list to play after touching Top Menu touching the key displays the previous list 4 Skip back or forward to another song Touching bl skips to the start of the next video Touching ka once skips to the start of the current video Touching again will skip to the previous video When the video with chapters played chapter can be skipped back and forward Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold ke or gt gt to fast reverse or fast forward If you touch and hold ke or gt gt for five seconds fast reverse fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys To re sume playback at a desired point touch P E aa or gt gt O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 6 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 6 Display the top category menu for video Touching the key displays the top category for video playback D Hide the touch panel keys Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again Browsing for a video Touching the item on list allows you to search for a video and play it in your iPod Narrowing down a video with the list 14 Touch MENU or Top Menu The search screen is displayed 7 40 Music f Z SN VE Brilliance tay Ae Driveit lt gt Es ag a _ Furtheri
74. the same for Viewing the traffic event on the previous page How to read traffic information on the map The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows O Aline is displayed only when the map scale is 2 5 miles 5 km or lower O Icon appears only when the scale on the map is 10 miles 20 km or lower If the scale is changed the icons are resized ac cording to the selected scale Traffic event icon e with yellow line Stop and go traffic e with red line Stopped traffic 341d NSIN UO UOHeUNOjU Bulsmolg Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct e Q with black line Closed blocked roads e etc Accidents constructions etc Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic congestion The navigation system checks whether or not there is the traffic information on your route at regular time intervals If the navigation system detects any traffic jams on your current route the system tries to find a better route in the background O The following types of traffic incidents on the route will be checked slow queuing and stationary traffic and closed blocked roads Checking for traffic congestion automatically If there is information about traffic congestion on your current route and if an alternative route can be found the navigation system will recommend a new alternative route automati cally In such a case the following screen will appear Heavy traffic A ian
75. there is no corresponding type on the entry the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry In such case say the type of phone number 4 Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list En 175 Chapter E9 Operatin Tips for Voice Operation For your voice commands to be correctly re cognized and interpreted ensure that condi tions are suitable for recognition Your Navigation System with Voice Close the vehicle windows Please note that wind through the vehicle win dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the vehicle can interfere with voice operation Position the microphone carefully For optimum pick up the microphone should be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the driver Pause before giving a command Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to fail Pronounce your commands carefully Speak slowly deliberately and clearly m 176 En Chapter Other functions 34 Setting the anti theft function You can set a password for the navigation sys tem If the back up lead is cut after the pass word is set the navigation system prompts for the password at the time of next boot up Setting the password 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch Areat followed by Area2 and then touch and hold Area3 Area Area2 Area3 7 oy i System p S
76. this system with an RCA cable such as general purpose AV equipment External storage device USB SD The SD memory card SDHC memory card and USB memory device are collectively re ferred to as the external storage device USB SD If it indicates the USB memory only it is referred to as the USB storage device SD memory card The SD memory card and SDHC memory card are collectively referred to as the SD memory card Notice regarding video viewing Remember that use of this system for com mercial or public viewing purposes may con stitute an infringement on the author s rights as protected by the Copyright Law m Notice regarding DVD Video viewing This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation and is in tended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering or disas sembly is prohibited Notice regarding MP3 file usage Supply of this navigation system conveys only a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e rev enue generating real time broadcasting ter restrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intra
77. to the beginning of stored data Using the Function menu 1 Touch SIRIUS on the AV Source menu to display the SIRIUS screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 156 En 2 Touch EJ SIRIUS 3 sA Function Memo Edit Game Alert Game Info Setting the memorized songs gt For details refer to this page Using the Game Alert function gt For details refer to the next page Displaying Game Information gt For details refer to the next page amp Setting the memorized songs Selecting the songs to alert You can change the setting of the alert when the track is broadcast again You can enable or disable alert for each song 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to select the desired song Function mf Memo Edit Delete Next P 3 Touch On Off to turn the setting on When the alert for the song is activated On appears at the beginning of the selected title O Touch On Off again to turn the setting off Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable alerts for all items at the same time This function is useful when you want to turn alerts off temporarily without changing each memorized song Chapter Using the SIRIUS tuner 28 1 Touch Memo Edit 2 Touch Alert O Touch to toggle the selection Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the
78. whether to display DivX exter nal subtitles or not O If no DivX external subtitle files exist the original DivX subtitles are displayed even when Custom is selected 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on page 130 2 Touch Subtitle File Touching Subtitle File switches this setting between Original and Custom O Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line If more than 42 characters are set the line breaks and the characters are dis played on the next line O Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen If more than 126 characters are set the excess characters will not be dis played O The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor responding subtitle files exist O Up to three lines can be displayed at once 132 En Chapter DVD Video DVD VR DivX setup 22 Language code chart for DVDs Language code input code Japanese ja 1001 English en 0514 French fr 0618 Spanish es 0519 German de 0405 Italian it 0920 Chinese zh 2608 Dutch nl 1412 Portuguese pt 1620 Swedish sv 1922 Russian ru 1821 Korean ko 1115 Greek el 0512 Afar aa 0101 Abkhazian ab 0102 Afrikaans af 0106 Amharic am 0113 Arabic ar 0118 Assamese as 0119 Aymara ay 0125 Azerbaijani az 0126 Bashkir ba 0201 Belorussian be 0205 Bulga
79. you touch and hold lt lt or gt gt for five seconds fast reverse fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys To re sume playback at a desired point touch P E lt or gt gt Opposite to key pushed for five seconds 3 Frame by frame playback or slow motion playback gt For details refer to frame by frame play back on this page gt For details refer to Slow motion playback on this page Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time gt For details refer to Searching for a speci fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on this page 128 En Frame by frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback Touch I gt during playback Each time you touch II you move ahead one frame To return to normal playback touch gt H O With some discs images may be unclear during frame by frame playback Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed Touch and hold I gt until ub is dis played during playback The icon mp is displayed and forward slow motion playback begins To return to normal playback touch gt gt or lt lt etc There is no sound during slow motion play back T With some discs images may be unclear during slow motion playback Reversed slow motion playback is not possi ble Searching for a specific scene and starting playback fro
80. you want to re fine Plays back the files related to the touched item 4 On the song or episode list touch the track you want to play O After you select the track using this func tion touching MENU displays the list pre viously selected Searching for applicable items alphabetically Using the search control displays the page which includes the first applicable option O This function is available for the alphabeti cal list only Al Alternative amp Punk Blues Jazz Latin Search control 1 Touch your desired category tab to dis play the list 2 Touch the item that you want to refine 3 Touch lt or gt to select the character 1 An article listed below and space at the be ginning of the artist name will be ignored and the next character will be taken into ac count for searching _ AP or ron AN An or an THE The or the 142 En 25 Using an iPod iPod 4 Touch the character key to display the page which includes applicable options 5 On the song or episode list touch the track you want to play Operating this navigation system s iPod function from your iPod This navigation system s iPod function can be operated from your iPod Sound can be heard from the car s speakers and operation can be conducted from your iPod This function can be operated with the follow ing iPod models Even if Change Control Mode
81. 00 800 x 480 Display method acnetesuinsuecs TFT Active matrix driving BACKING t enih LED Color SyYStEmM cheer detacecteachnecia NTSC compatible Tolerable temperature range POWE OR nininini 14 F to 140 F Power Off sedi dteitencalctel 4 F to 176 F Angle adjUStMent sess 0 to 22 214 En Audio Maximum power output Continuous power output Load impedance weessecssssessseseeeee Preout output level max Preout impedance wesecsessseseeeee 50W x 4 50W x 2ch 4Q 70W x 1 ch 2Q for subwoofer 22W x 4 50 Hz to 15 kHz 5 THD 4Q LOAD Both Channels Driven 4Q 4Q to 8Q 2Q for 1 ch allowable 4V 100 ohm Equalizer 7 Band Graphic Equalizer PRECIUCRICY niiina HPF Subwoofer FrEGUEN OY renean Region NUMDEr esssesssessesstesseess Signal format Sampling frequency 50 Hz 125 Hz 315 Hz 800 Hz 2 kKHz 5 kHz 12 5 kHz cen pom Ol 3 5dB 100 Hz 3 dB 10 kHz 10dB 100 Hz 6 5 dB 10 kHz 11dB 100 Hz 11 dB 10 kHz volume 30 dB 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz 12 dB oct 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz 18 dB oct 24 6dB Normal Reverse 0dB to 12dB DVD Video CD MP3 WMA AAC DivX system DVD Video DVD VR DVD R DL DVD RW CD ROM CD DA CD R RW 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 96 kHz Number of quantization bits 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit linear 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz with DVD at sampling frequency 96 kHz 97 dB 1 kH
82. 01 P01 WMA usg Current ROOT Now Playing 01 20 Q Media Repeat 2 Pioneer Time 01 amp AVIC 9 Navigation Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 2 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video files in the external storage device USB SE 3 Skip forward or backward Touching bl skips to the start of the next file Touching ka once skips to the start of the current file Touching again will skip to the previous file Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold ka or gt gt to fast reverse or fast forward O There is no sound on fast reverse or for ward O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 4 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on an external storage device USB SD Touch a folder on the list to view its contents Touch a track on the list to play that track 1 Touch List The contents of the folder in which the cur rently playing file is located are displayed m Touch and hold List The contents of the root folder are displayed 2 Touch the folder that you want to view i m 01 01 uss
83. 1 N Hollywood Fwy US 101 N CA 170 N Hollywood Fwy Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be set and waypoints and final destination can be sorted automati cally or manually Chapter Setting a route to your destination 06 0 When you set waypoints in the route to 4 Touch OK on the Waypoints List your destination the route up to the next screen waypoint will appear in light green The rest The route is recalculated and Route confir of the route will appear in light blue mation screen appears gt For details concerning operations refer to Adding a waypoint on the next page 1 Touch Waypoints on the Route con firmation screen The Waypoints List screen appears Waypoints List 11287 11200 Yarnell St Sylmar Delete 45 112 Bradley Ave Sylmar Delete Sylmar Park Sylmar Delete 2 Foothill Blvd Los Angeles Delete 2 Touch Add The Select Search method screen appears Select Search method crae sey lt i IN Address AVIC FEEDS POI o N LAR Favorites History Coordinate Map Search S UO1 EUI Sap ANOA 0 3 NO1 e Hul a5S 3 Search for a location gt For details about the search methods refer to Chapter 8 After searching for a point display it on a map then touch OK to add to the Way points List screen gt Waypoints List 11287 11200 Yarnell St Sylmar Delete 45 112 Bradley Ave Sylmar Delete Sylmar Park Sylmar D
84. 1287 11200 Yarnell St Sylmar Delete 45 112 Bradley Ave Sylmar Delete Sylmar Park Sylmar Delete Delete Foothill Blvd Los Angeles Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be set and waypoints and final destination can be sorted automati cally or manually 1 Display the Waypoints List screen 2 Touch Add The Select Search method screen appears Select Search method j GES 1 L wy 7 lt lt N Address POI AVIC FEEDS eal g j z4 Favorites S History Coordinate Map Search 3 Search for a location gt For details about the search methods refer to Chapter 8 After searching for a point display it on a map then touch OK to add to the Way points List screen Chapter Checking and modifying the current route gt Waypoints List 11287 11200 Yarnell St Sylmar 45 112 Bradley Ave Sylmar Delete Delete Sylmar Park Sylmar Delete Delete Sylmar Park Sylmar Delete Foothill Blvd Los Angeles 4 Touch OK on the Waypoints List screen The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears 5 Touch OK The map of the current position appears Deleting a waypoint You can delete waypoints from the route and then recalculate the route You can delete waypoints successively 1 Display the Waypoints List screen 2 Touch Delete next to the waypoint that you want to delete The touched waypoint will be d
85. 2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 TEL 905 479 4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A de C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 SoS AY A BRD E HAR GAbTAALWAGER Ee 4 3E an 02 2521 3588 TRET Be AMAA Published by Pioneer Corporation SI LBER IB SATE RR SE P94 901 6 Copyright 2009 by Pioneer Corporation ad 0852 2848 6488 All rights reserved Printed in Thailand lt KKYZX gt lt 10G00000 gt lt CRB3035 C N gt UC
86. 90 Positioning by GPS 190 Positioning by Dead Reckoning 190 How do GPS and Dead Reckoning work together 190 Handling large errors 191 When positioning by GPS is impossible 191 Conditions likely to cause noticeable positioning errors 192 Route setting information 193 Route search specifications 193 Handling and care of discs 194 Built in drive and care 195 Ambient conditions for playing a disc 195 Playable discs 195 DVD Video and CD 195 AVCHD recorded discs 195 Playing DualDisc 196 Dolby Digital 196 DIS sound 196 Detailed information for playable media 196 C8 En Compatibility 196 Media compatibility chart 199 Bluetooth 202 About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 203 HD Radio Technology 203 SD and SDHC logo 203 WMA WMV 203 DivX 203 AAC 204 Detailed information regarding connectable iPods 204 iPod 204 iPhone 205 ilunes 205 Using the LCD screen correctly 205 Handling the LCD screen 205 Liquid crystal display LCD screen 205 Maintaining the LCD screen 205 LED light emitting diode backlight 205 Display information 207 Destination Menu 207 Phone Menu 207 Settings Menu 207 Glossary 211 Specifications 214 Chapter Introduction cH Information to User This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence
87. 944 pixels or smaller Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller Proper compatibility with allowable files is not guaranteed Imported original images will be stored in the built in memory but the ability to save these images cannot be guaranteed com pletely If your original image data is de leted insert the SD memory card again and re import the original image 1 Create a folder named Pictures on the top most directory of the SD memory card and store the picture files in this folder 2 Store the picture files in Pictures 3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 4 Display the System Settings screen 5 Touch Splash Screen The Select Splash Screen screen appears 6 Touch Select from SD The Select Splash Screen screen appears 7 Touch the image to use as the splash screen from the list The image is displayed on the screen 8 Touch OK The image is set as the splash screen and the System Settings screen returns Setting for rear view camera The following two functions are available The rear view camera feature requires a separately sold rear view camera e g ND BC2 For de tails consult your dealer saduasajaid Hulziwio snD En 101 Rear view camera The navigation system features a function that automatically switches to the full scree
88. ATION EXPOSURE CAUTION THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA ZARD A warnine Handling the cord on this product or cords asso ciated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi tion 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling License Agreement PIONEER AVIC Z110BT for U S A THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS LEE END USER AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS USAVING C PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFT WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERG CSUPPLIERS AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 14 IF YOU DO NOTAGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEIPT OP THE PRODUCTS T THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE MENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non transferable non exclusive li
89. Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the re cipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free En uoI pnpo u Chapter KD Introduction program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the origi nal library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License per mits more lax criteria for linking other
90. C WAVE H 264 MPEG4 WMV Bluetooth 2 0 EDR 4dBm Max Power class 2 87 9 MHz to 107 9 MHz 9 dBf 0 8 uV 75Q mono S N 30 dB 72 dB IHF A network 0 3 at 65 dBf 1 kHz stereo 0 1 at 65 dBf 1 kHz mono 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz 3 dB 45 dB at 65 dBf 1 kHz 530 kHz to 1710 kHz 10 kHz 25 UV S N 20 dB Signal to noise ratio wre 62 dB IHF A network CEA2006 Specifications sae mos CEA 290 Power OUtPUt dusandisiinesine 14W RMS x 4 Channels 4Q and lt 1 THD N S N ratio axsicecisiaseswcatcapabancadasestenvens 91 dBA reference 1W into 4Q Note Specifications and design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to im provements xipusddy Register your product at http www pioneerelectronics com in Canada Nttp www pioneerelectronics ca See Visit our website page PIONEER CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O Box 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium Belgique TEL 0 3 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 5 Arco Lane Heatherton Victoria 3202 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L8R OP
91. CAUTION When a route is calculated the route and voice guidance for the route are automatically set Also for day or time traffic regulations only infor mation about traffic regulations applicable at the time when the route was calculated is consid ered One way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration For example if a street is open during the morning only but you arrive later it would be against the traffic regula tions so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traf fic regulations e The calculated route is one example of the route to your destination decided by the na vigation system while taking the type of streets or traffic regulations into account It is not necessarily an optimum route In some cases you may not be able to set the streets you want to take If you need to take a certain street set a waypoint on that street e f the destination is too far there may be in stances where the route cannot be set It you want to set a long distance route going across several areas set waypoints along the way e During voice guidance turns and intersec tions trom the freeway are announced However if you pass intersections turns and other guidance points in rapid succes sion some may delay or not be announced e tis possible that guidance may direct you off a freeway and then back on again e n
92. Cause Action Reference Connection failed The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire Activate the target phone s Bluetooth wire less technology is turned off less technology The cellular phone is paired con Cancel the pairing connection and retry nected with another device Rejection has been received from Operate the target phone and accept the con the cellular phone nection request from the navigation system Furthermore check the connection settings on your cellular phone The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti found vated and whether the distance to your cellu lar phone is not too far Could not find any available No available phone exists in the sur Activate the target phone s Bluetooth wire phone roundings when the system less technology searches for connectable cellular e Check whether your cellular phone is acti phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and whether the distance to your cellu technology lar phone is not too far Registration failed The cellular phone s Bluetooth wire Keep turning the target phone s Bluetooth less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registra the registration step tion Rejection by the cellular phone has Operate the target phone and accept the re received gistration request from the navigation system Furthermore check the connection settings gt on your cellular phone D Re
93. DPCM 22 05 kHz and 44 1 kHz Quantization bits oa et bits Note The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded AAC compatibility Media CD R RW DVD R RW R USB storage de DL vice Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps CBR Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44 1 kHz 8 kHz to 18 kHz SD memory card Note The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes 200 En Appendix Appendix OS DivX compatibility lad R RW R USB storage de i SD memory card vice Media CD R RW Profile DivX version ore Ver 3 11 Ver 4 x Ver 5 x Compatible audio codec MP3 Dolby Digital Bit rate MP3 8 kbps to 320 kbps CBR VBR DivX files on the external storage device USB SD cannot be played Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz MP3 for emphasis Notes The navigation system is not compatible with the following DivX Ultra format DivX files without video data DivX files encoded with LPCM Linear PCM audio codec Depending on the file information composition such as the number of audio streams there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs If a file contains more than 4GB playback stops before the end Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and 10 08 Mbps for DVDs xipueddy Video files comp
94. Distance and automatically replaces the value for Clears the learned results stored in Distance calculating distance When the distance accuracy is low touch C1 If ND PG1 is connected the distance Distance calculation value cannot be replaced automatically Using the Gas Mileage function Inputting the fuel consumption information for calculating the fuel cost You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina tion by entering the fuel consumption informa tion in the navigation system 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 2 Touch Gas Mileage The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears il Gas Mileage Setting Surface Road Gas Mileage Freeway Gas Mileage Gas Price Per Unit Gas Price Calculation Gas Unit Currency 3 Enter the fuel consumption informa tion Enter the following items e Surface Road Gas Mileage Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin ary roads O How the fuel cost is entered depends on the Gas Unit setting When Gas Unit is set to Gallon Enter how many miles kilometers you get to a gallon When Gas Unit is set to Liter Enter how much fuel you need to tra vel 60 miles 100 kilometers e Freeway Gas Mileage Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the freeway O How the fuel cost is entered depends on the Gas Unit setting When Gas Unit is set to Gallon Enter how many miles kilometers you get to a gallon When Gas Unit
95. DivX Setup The DVD DivX Setup screen appears gt DVD DivX Setup DVD V Subtitle Language Audio Language Menu Language Multi Angle TV Aspect Parental Level Auto Play S 5 Touch the desired function Setting the top priority languages You can assign the top priority language to the top priority subtitle audio and menu in initial playback If the selected language is recorded on the disc subtitles audio and menu are dis played or output in that language 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on this page 2 Touch Subtitle Language Audio Lan guage or Menu Language Each language menu is displayed and the cur rently set language is selected 130 En 3 Touch the desired language When you select Others a language code input display is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch Enter gt Refer to Language code chart for DVDs on page 133 O Ifthe selected language is not recorded on the disc the default language specified on the disc is output and displayed O You can also switch the subtitle and audio language by touching S Title or Audio during playback O Even if you use S Title or Audio to switch the subtitle or audio language this does not affect the settings here Setting the angle icon display You can set the angle icon e to display in scenes
96. E R position 102 En ED Customizing preferences Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel touch panel calibration If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch adjust the response po sitions of the touch panel screen 1 Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen which could damage the screen 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Screen Calibration A message confirming whether to start the ca libration appears 3 Gently touch the center of mark dis played on the screen The target indicates the order After you touch all marks the adjusted posi tion data is saved Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data Press the MODE button Returns to the previous adjustment position Press and hold the MODE button Cancels the adjustment Chapter Customizing preferences 13 Setting the illumination color The illumination color can be selected from 11 different colors Furthermore the illumination color can be switched between these 11 colors in order To set the illumination color display the Illu mination Color screen 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch illumi Color The Illumination Color screen appears l Illumination Color Base Color Choice Custom Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Selecting
97. For more details about the map coverage of this navigation system refer to the information on our website Protecting the LCD panel and screen O Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the LCD screen when this product is not being used Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures O When using a cellular phone keep the an tenna of the cellular phone away from the LCD screen to prevent disruption of the video in the form of spots colored stripes etc O To protect the LCD screen from damage be sure to touch the touch panel keys with your finger and gently touch the screen 28 En KD Introduction Notes on internal memory Before removing the vehicle battery If the battery is disconnected or discharged the memory will be erased and must be repro gramed O Some data remains Read Returning the na vigation system to the default or factory set tings before you operate this function gt For more detailed information about the items which would be erased refer to Returning the navigation system to the default or factory settings on page 178 Data subject to erasure The information is erased by disconnecting the yellow lead from the battery or removing the battery itself However some items re main O Some data remains Read Returning the na vigation system to the default or factory set tings before you operate this function g
98. Gas Prices Movie Times Weather Traffic Events tivation SO that the navigation system can re e p gt ceive the information TAE On Traffic Flow Local Events Route This operation must be performed under the following conditions You are currently in the coverage area of MSN Direct 2 Touch Gas Prices The Gas Prices screen appears ba Notice about MSN Direct Status 1 Boot up your navigation system Gas Prices 11 15 1064 2 Touch Destination on the Top Menu l Name and then touch MSN Direct ee The MSN Direct screen appears a Arco 3 Touch Status Unknown Shell 241d NSIN UO uonewozu Buismoig 4 Wait until the activation status changes to Active It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to 3 Touch the desired tab to change the complete the activation sort order After activation is complete the information Available options will be available on each menu m Dist default Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance trom the vehicle position Browsing gas prices Name Sorts the items in the list alphabetically Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are s Price displayed in a list en 69 Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct Sorts the items in the list by price m Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when new gas prices in formation is received 4 Touch on the item that you wan
99. HOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT BREACH OF WAR RANTY NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY MIS REPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS IF PIONEER S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE YOU AGREE THAT PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT 60 OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO DUCT Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim itation of incidental or consequential da mages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be applic able to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or preempted 4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received trom Pioneer nor the direct product thereof will be exported outside Canada except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada If the Software has been rightfully obtained by you outside of Canada you agree that you will not re export the Software nor any other technical data received trom Pioneer nor the direct product thereof except as per mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic tion in which you obtained the Software 5 TERMINATION
100. Information with the mark appears only O Touching this item enables you to hear when the route is set the next guidance again O Depending on the conditions and settings 4 Second Maneuver Arrow some items may not be displayed Shows the turning direction after next and the M Name of the street to be used or next gui distance to there dance point gt For details refer to Displaying maneu 2 Next direction of travel vers on page 45 When you approach a guidance point this Zoom in Zoom out item appears Touching E displays touch panel keys for As you get closer to the guidance point the changing the map scale and the map orienta color of the item changes to green tion Touching this item enables you to hear Current position the next guidance again Indicates the current location of your vehicle O You can select between display and The apex of the triangular mark indicates your non display orientation and the display moves automati gt For details refer to Displaying man cally as you drive euvers on page 45 O The apex of the triangular mark is the 3 Distance to the guidance point proper current position Shows the distance to the next guidance TD Street name or city name that your vehi point cle is traveling along en 39 gt For details refer to Setting the current street name display on page 45 Extension tab for the AV information bar Touching this tab opens the AV information bar and enables you to
101. Input 162 City Map ae ANT CTRL 162 City Map Barrier 44 Wide Mode 163 Show Traffic Incident 45 Rear SP 163 Bluetooth Connected 45 Mute 163 Current Street Name 45 Mute Level 164 Favorites Icon 45 Guidance Tel SP 164 3D Land Mark 45 VR Catalog Menu 164 5 Show Manuever 45 DivX VOD 165 A MSN Direct A6 x Quick Access Selection 49 Overlay POI 46 View Mode 41 Day Night Display 48 AV Guide Mode 49 Road Color 48 Appendix MD Appendx SSOOC C SSSSCC C C S AV Sound Settings menu Bluetooth Settings menu gt AV Sound Settings i Bluetooth Settings DVD V Connection FAD BAL 10 Loudness Sub Woofer Registration Device Name Password Bass Booster Staging Bluetooth On Off Echo Cancel FAD BAL Balance 166 Connection 82 EQ 166 Registration 79 Loudness 168 Device Name 90 Sub Woofer 168 Password 90 HPF 168 Bluetooth On Off 90 SLA 168 Echo Cancel 90 Bass Booster 169 Auto Answer Preference 90 Staging 169 Refuse All Calls 91 Clear Memory 91 Firmware update 91 210 En Glossary AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 Aspect ratio This is the width to height ratio of a TV screen A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4 3 Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16 9 providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atm
102. Media Repeat all compressed audio files in the selected external storage de vice USB SD e Track Repeat just the current track e Folder Repeat the current folder O If you skip the file forward or backward when the repeat play range in Track the repeat play range changes to Folder 2 Play tracks in a random order Random play lets you playback tracks in random order within the current repeat range Touching Random switches between On and Off O If you turn Random to On while the repeat play range is set to Track the re peat play range changes to Folder automatically 3 Scan folders and tracks 136 En Chapter Playing video files from USB or SD 24 You can play the video files stored in the exter nal storage device USB SD O In the following description the SD mem ory card and USB memory device are col lectively referred to as the external storage device USB SD If it indicates the USB memory device only it is referred to as the USB storage device Starting procedure 1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 33 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Touch USB or SD on the AV Source menu to display each operation screen O Playback is performed in order of f
103. Method 3 Method 4 Phone Menu All settings J J J menu Other functions Anti theft password AV functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Volume _ AV Settings All settings Jf _ AV Sound All settings _ Function menu of each AV source All settings v E Picture Adjustment J i Other functions a hv a Tilt x Appendix Appendix OGG Troubleshooting If you have problems operating your navigation system refer to this section The most common problems are listed below along with likely causes and solutions If a solution to your problem cannot be found here contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility Problems with the navigation screen Symptom Cause Action Reference The power doesn t turn on The Leads and connectors are incor Confirm once more that all connections are navigation system doesn t oper rectly connected correct ate The fuse is blown Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing then replace the fuse Be very sure to install a cor rect fuse with the same rating Noise and other factors are causing Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the built in microprocessor to oper the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc ate incorrectly off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on You cannot position your vehicle The GPS antenna is in an unsuitable The qua
104. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a joint venture partnership or principal agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you The internal laws of California shall govern this Agreement and you consent to the juris diction of the Northern District of California or the State of California for the County of Santa Clara Sections 2 10 shall survive the expira tion or termination of this Agreement This Agreement may be amended altered or modi fied only by Tele Atlas You may not assign any part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas prior written consent You acknowledge and under stand that the Data may be subject to restric tions on exportation and agree to comply with any applicable export laws In the event that any provision or part of a provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid illegal C46 En KD Introduction or unenforceable such provision or part there of shall be stricken from this Agreement and the remainder of this Agreement shall be valid legal and enforceable to the maximum extent possible Any notice under this Agree ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North America Inc Attention Contracts De partment 11 Lafayette Street Lebanon NH 03766 USA The covenants and obligations un dertaken by you herein are intended for the di rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by Tele Atlas directly against you Chapter Introduction cH Licenses 7 Zip License for use
105. Pioneer Operation Manual FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION RECEIVER AVIC Z110BT Notice to all users This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicle s parking brake and depending on your vehicle additional installation may be required For more information please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at 800 421 1404 H Radio SUPER TUNERII D English Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly After you have finished reading the instructions keep this man ual in a safe place for future reference Q Important The screens shown in the examples may differ from actual screens Actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function improvements D Introduction Information to User 9 License Agreement 10 PIONEER AVIC Z110BT for U S A 10 PIONEER AVIC Z110BT for Canada 12 Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data 14 Licenses 17 About the database 22 About the Data for the Map Database 22 Copyright Notices for North American data 22 Important Safety Information 23 GOOG 411 service 24 Additional Safety Information 24 Parking brake interlock 24 When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT 25 Jo avoid battery exhaustion 25 Rearviewcamera 25 Not
106. Pods may be limited if cata loging of iPod content is not completed Cata loging of iPod content only occurs when the system is in AV Source mode and the iPod is the selected and displayed AV Source screen Cataloging of iPod content will not occur if the system is off if any other AV Source is selected aside from iPod or if the system is in any other mode aside from AV Source mode such as Destination Menu Settings Menu Phone Menu or the map screen If you wish to use Voice Control for all iPod content it is recommended that you first connect your iPod select iPod as the AV source and keep the iPod screen displayed until cataloging is completed cataloging of iPod content should only take a few minutes and will depend on the size of the content stored on your iPod A message will be dis played when cataloging is completed 1 Touch VR Catalog Menu on the AV System Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sys tem Settings menu on page 162 2 Touch On or Off to activate or deacti vate VR Catalog Mode Touch Cancel Stops the cataloging of iPod If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod touch Restart Displaying your DivX VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD video on demand content on this navigation system you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider You do this by gen
107. R mode can be played back However untinalized discs may not be played back Unplayable discs should be finalized e DVD R DL Dual Layer discs which have been recorded with Layer Jump recording cannot be played back e For more information about recording mode please contact the manufacturer of media recorders or writing software e The following logo indicates that this unit is compatible with DVD RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format VR mode RW COMPATIBLE CD R CD RW discs Untinalized discs cannot be played back It may not be possible to playback CD R CD RW discs recorded on a music CD re corder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics scratches or dirt on the disc or dirt scratches or condensation on the lens of the built in drive Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible depending on the recording device writing software their settings and other environmental fac tors Please record with the correct format For more details please contact manufacturer of media recorders or writing software Titles and other text information recorded on a CD R CD RW disc may not be dis played by this product in the case of audio data CD DA Read the precautions with CD R CD RW discs before using them Common notes about the external storage device USB SD Do not leave the external storage device USB SD in any locatio
108. RD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD VICE OR INFORMATION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI TION OF THE AGREEMENT 4 Limitation of Liability TELEATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER RUPTION OR THE LIKE REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITH STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED HEREIN TELEATLAS SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY CAUSE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT 5 Termination This Agreement will terminate immediately and automatically without notice if you breach any term of this Agreement You agree that in the event of termination of the Agree ment you shall return the Data including all documentation and all copies to Tele Atlas and its suppliers Chapter Introduction cH 6 Indemnity You agree to indemnify defend and hold Tele Atlas its Licensors and its Suppliers includ ing their respective licensors suppliers as signees subsidiaries affiliated companies and the respective officers directors employ ees shareholders agents and representatives free and harmless from and against any liabili ty loss injury including injuries resulting in
109. S channel select mode on the next page D Variable information area Shows various information about the broad cast channel currently being received gt For more details about the displayed in formation refer to Switch the SIRIUS display on the next page Using the touch panel keys Touch SIRIUS on the AV Source menu to display the SIRIUS screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 ALL CH MODE SIRIUS 3 P C l s ALLCH J9UN SNIMIS 94 Bbuisn CATEGORY MODE SIRIUS 3 P C 1 s CATEGORY MODE lt 4 Category gt lt Seek da D Disp ue 6 DAO W M Memorize the current song gt For details refer to Memorizing the song on the next page 2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode gt For details refer to Using the Instant Replay function on page 156 3 Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 156 4 Recalling channels from the preset Touch to recall the preset channel Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at a time O If you keep touching lt 4 or gt you can skip the broadcasting channels 6 Select a SIRIUS band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS band is displayed SIRIUS 1 SIRIUS 2 or SIRIUS 3 This is useful for switching the preset T Preset key for receiving the traffic audio service gt For details refer to Us
110. SO9660 format there are regulations for the following two levels e Level 1 The file name is in 8 3 format the name consists of up to eight characters halt byte English capital letters half byte numerals and the _ sign with a Tile extension of three characters e Level 2 The file name can have up to 31 characters including the separation mark and a file extension Each folder contains less than eight hierarchies e Extended formats Joliet File names can have up to 64 characters Romeo File names can have up to 128 characters JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group and is an international still image com pression standard MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 It is an audio compression standard established by a working group MPEG of the ISO Interna tional Organization for Standardization MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1 10th the size of a conventional disc 212 En MPEG This stands tor Moving Pictures Experts Group and is an international video image compression standard Multi angle With regular TV programs although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles let ting you choose your viewing angle as desired Multi audio Multilingual dialog Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi ple languages or audio recorded
111. Settings screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu Chapter Customizing preferences 13 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch System Settings The System Settings screen appears l System Settings Regional Settings Splash Back Screen Camera Screen Illumi Color Bene Calibration Information hm Restore Factory Settings Customizing the regional settings 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Regional Settings The Regional Settings screen appears l Regional Settings Program Language Voice Language Time km mile Speed Selecting the language You can set the languages used on the pro gram and voice guidance Each language can be set separately 1 Display the Regional Settings screen 2 Touch Program Language The language list is displayed 3 Touch the desired language After the language is selected the screen re turns to the previous screen 4 Touch Voice Language The Voice Language Selection screen ap pears 5 Touch the desired language After the language is selected the screen re turns to the previous screen 6 Touch OK on the Regional Settings screen A message confirming whether to restart the navigation system appears 7 Touch OK The navigation system restarts Press the MODE button or the HOME button Cancels the setting of the languages
112. Touch Register from mobile phone The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth wireless technology connection il Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Please follow the instructions on your mobile phone Cancel Search Again 5 Register the navigation system on your Bluetooth device If your device asks you to enter a password enter the PIN code password of the naviga tion system When the device is successfully registered the connection settings are made from the de vice O If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning 2JIA P Y OO AaN g 4 6ul DUUOD pue Hulia sIbay Deleting a registered device When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth devices and you want to add another one you must first delete one of the registered devices O Ifa registered phone is deleted all the phone book entries and call history lists that correspond to the phone will be also cleared 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Registration The following message appears l Bluetooth Settings Connection Unable to register Delete one of more records before registering OK Echo Cancel 3 Touch OK The Delete from Connection List screen appears i Delete from Connection List My Phone 0019874625C5 My Phone02 XXXXXXXXXXXX My Phone03 XXXXXXXXXXXX My Phone04 XXXXXXXXXXXX My Phone05 XXXXXXXXXXXX 4 Touch the Bluetooth device name that you
113. When Folder is selected it is not pos sible to play back a subfolder of that x folder 44 1l O When playing discs with compressed audio files and audio data CD DA re peat play is performed within DivX vi deos even if Disc is selected Touching or Y switches the selection to DVD setup adjustments the next or previous page in the list gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup menu on the next 3 To return to the previous screen touch page List m04 03 MPEG A Me 13 10 g Disc 01 04 oapia XAIq e BulAejd Rock Pra e Hojo 1 KSG t 1 01 Pioneer Time03 avi Media lt r om m 02 Pioneer Time05 avi OO U a a 03 Pioneer Time04 avi 04 Pioneer Time02 avi a I 05 Pioneer Time01 avi Using the Function menu 1 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the DivX screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys Chapter IED DVD Video DVD VR DivX setup Configure the DVD Video DVD VR DivxX player Displaying DVD DivX Setup menu 1 Play the disc that contains DVD Video DVD VR or DivX 2 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the normal playback screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 3 Touch EJ The Function menu appears 4 Touch DVD
114. Y FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PRO VIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR COR RECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these te
115. about DivX VOD gt For details refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 165 AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 Sev eral applications can be used to encode AAC files but file formats and extensions differ de pending on the application which is used to encode This unit plays back AAC files en coded by iTunes version 7 7 a 204 En Detailed information regarding connectable iPods A CAUTION e Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost from an iPod even if that data is lost while using the navigation system e Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex tended amounts of time Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iPod maltunc tion due to the resulting high temperature e Do not leave the iPod in any location with high temperatures e Firmly secure the iPod when driving Do not let the iPod fall onto the floor where it may be come jammed under the brake or gas pedal For details refer to the iPod s manuals iPod iPod Made for iPod means that an electronic ac cessory has been designed to connect specifi cally to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance stan dards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registere
116. act e U S A Pioneer Electronics USA Inc CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION PO Box 1760 Long Beach CA 90801 1760 800 421 1404 CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada Inc CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario LORUP 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 For warranty information please see the Lim ited Warranty sheet included with your pro duct Visit Our Web site Visit us at the following site http www pioneerelectronics com In Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca 1 Register your product We will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies 3 Download owner s manuals order product catalogs research new products and much more 4 Receive notices of software upgrades and software updates J 26 En KD Introduction Manual overview How to use this manual Finding the operation procedure for what you want to do When you have decided what you want to do you can find the page you need from the Contents Finding the operation procedure from a menu name If you want to check the meaning of an item displayed on the screen you will find the ne cessary page from the Display information at the end of the manual Glossary Use the glossary to find the meanings of terms Terminology Before moving on take a
117. ading the screen 113 Using the touch panel keys 113 Selecting a track from the list 114 Using the Function menu 114 18 Playing music files on ROM Reading the screen 115 Using the touch panel keys 116 Selecting a track from the list 116 Using the Function menu 116 Playing a DVD Video Reading the screen 118 Using the touch panel keys 118 Resuming playback Bookmark 119 en 5 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 120 Directnumber search 120 Operating the DVD menu 120 Using DVD menu by touch panel keys 120 Frame by frame playback 121 Slow motion playback 121 Using the Function menu 121 Playing a DVD VR disc Reading the screen 123 Using the touch panel keys 123 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 124 Switch the playback mode 125 Using the short time skip function 125 Playing by selecting from the title list 125 Frame by frame playback 125 Slow motion playback 125 Using the Function menu 126 Playing a DivX video Reading the screen 127 Using the touch panel keys 127 Frame by frame playback 128 Slow motion playback 128 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 128 Playing by selecting from the title list 129 Using the Function menu 129 22 DVD Video DVD VR DivX setup Displaying DVD DivX Setu
118. an play a DVD VR DVD Video Recording Format disc using the built in drive of the na vigation system This section describes opera tions for DVD VR discs Reading the screen Dolby D Original lt CM Skip CM Skip amp TE ee Mode Change O Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows which digital sound format Surround sound format has been selected Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current title 6 Current time T Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number currently se lected Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type such as Mch Multi channel 9 Play mode indicator Shows the current play mode gt For details refer to Switch the playback mode on page 125 Mixing condition indicator Shows the current mixing condition m Using the touch panel keys Playback screen page1 S01 02 DolbyD DOAR C1 1 ich Original BL lt CM Skip f CM Skip a z D y o ee Mode Change Playback screen page2 02 Dolby D 1 1ch Original Audio EE x lt Tite te 12 gine S Title Search as O With some discs the icon may be dis played meaning that the operation is not valid Display the Function menu gt For details r
119. and distribution 7 Zip Copyright C 1999 2007 Igor Pavlov Licenses for files are 1 7z dll GNU LGPL unRAR restriction 2 All other files GNU LGPL The GNU LGPL unRAR restriction means that you must follow both GNU LGPL rules and unRAR restriction rules Note You can use 7 Zip on any computer including a computer in a commercial organization You don t need to register or pay for 7 Zip GNU LGPL information This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Pub lic License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be use ful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser Gen eral Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA unRAR restriction The decompression engine for RAR archives was devel oped using source code of unRAR program All copyrights to original unRAR code are owned by Alex ander Roshal The license for original unRAR code has the following restriction The unRAR sources cannot be used to re create the RAR compression a
120. anually touch lt or gt briefly The frequencies move up or down one step at a time Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning touch and hold lt or gt for about one second and release The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is found O You can cancel seek tuning by touching either lt 4 or gt briefly O If you touch and hold lt 4 or gt you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tuning will start as Soon as you re lease the keys O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference Ree 4 41 530 kHz 530kHz 4 lt 4 P CH gt 600kHz 1000kHz 1400kHz 1710kHz 1440kHz Detail Touch Preset or Detail Each touch of Preset or Detail changes the detailed information display or preset list display Chapter Using the radio AM 15 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall also with the touch of a key Wee 4 41 530 kHz 530kHz lt PCH gt 600kHz 1000kHz 1400kHz 1710kHz 1440kHz Detail Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to stor
121. ary and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d SS If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application pro gram that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful Chapter Introduction cH For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the ap plication does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separat
122. atibility USB SD File extension avi a mp4 MPEG MPEG Hss MPEG O Nips MPEG 4 H 264 MPEG 4 codec Linear PCM Compatible audio LPCM IMA codec ADPCM MP3 Image size Image size Image size Image size Image size QVGA 320 pix QVGA 320 pix QVGA 320 pix QVGA 320 pix QVGA 320 pix els x 240 pixels els x 240 pixels els x 240 pixels els x 240 pixels els x 240 pixels Bit rate Bit rate Bit rate Bit rate Bit rate 768 kbps 768 kbps 384 kbps 768 kbps 384 kbps Frame rate Frame rate Frame rate Frame rate Frame rate 30 fps 30 fps 30 fps 30 fps 30 fps Recommended video specifications Maximum file size 2GB Maximum playback iotas time Appendix MD Append SSSC S SSSSSC lt lt Common notes The navigation system may not operate cor rectly depending on the application used to encode WMA files Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data The navigation system is not compatible with packet write data transfer This navigation system can recognize up to 32 characters beginning with the first char acter including extension for the file and folder name Depending on the display area the navigation system may try to dis play them with a reduced font size How ever the
123. ations 150 Selecting a channel from the list 150 Using My Mix function 150 Using the direct traffic announcement function 151 Using the Function menu 151 Setting the memorized songs 152 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner Reading the screen 153 Using the touch panel keys 153 Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly 154 Display the Radio ID 154 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 155 Using My Mix function 155 Using the direct traffic announcement function 155 Using the Instant Replay function 156 Using the Function menu 156 Setting the memorized songs 156 Using the Game Alert function 157 Displaying Game Information 157 Using AV input Using AV1 158 Using AV2 158 Using the touch panel keys 158 Using the external unit EXT1 EXT2 Reading the screen 159 Using the touch panel keys 159 31 Other functions Selecting the video for Rear display 160 Operating the picture adjustment 160 32 Customizing preferences Options on the AV System Settings menu 162 Displaying the AV System Settings menu 162 Setting video input 1 AV1 162 Setting video input 2 AV2 162 Switching the auto antenna setting 162 Changing the wide screen mode 163 Setting the rear output 163 Switching the muting attenuation timing 163 Switching the muting attenuation level 164 Changing the voice output of the naviga
124. ause ing angles gt Switch the display O During playback of a scene shot from P Touching Disp changes the indication on the multiple angles the angle icon w is o information plate as follows displayed Turn the angle icon display lt Disc information display Repeat range and on or off using the DVD DivX Setup 9 L R select display menu 6 Hide the touch panel keys gt For details refer to Setting the angle icon Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys display on page 130 Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display Change the subtitle Multi subtitle the touch panel keys again Each touch of S Title switches between the D Display the DVD menu keypad subtitle languages gt For details refer to Using DVD menu by Change audio language and audio sys touch panel keys on the next page tems Multi audio Switch next page of touch panel keys Each touch of Audio switches between Stop playback audio languages and audio systems Skip the title forward or backward O DTS audio cannot be output so select Touching gt skips to the start of the next title an audio setting other than DTS Touching lt skips to the start of the previous O Display indications such as MPEG A title and Mch indicate the audio system re i Frame by frame playback or slow motion corded on the DVD Depending on the playback setting playback may not use the same gt For details refer to frame by frame play audio system
125. avigation system If the registered device features HFP the hands free connection is made If the registered device features A2DP Blue tooth Audio connection is made 80 En O If the registered device features both HFP and A2DP the hands free connection is made and then the Bluetooth Audio con nection is made Searching for a specified Bluetooth device If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device using Select specific devices and Register from mobile phone try this method if your Bluetooth device is found in the list 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices For some Bluetooth devices no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 3 Touch Registration The Nearby Device List screen appears 4 Touch Select specific devices The Select specific devices screen appears i Select specific devices 7 Other phones Headset Phone Disable automatic sync LG U8360 Sagem Samsung A9xx 5 Touch the Bluetooth device name to be connected The system searches for devices featuring Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list if a device is found Chapter il Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Select specific devices O If you cannot find the desired d
126. aws of the State of California If any provision of this Agreement is declared in valid or unenforceable the remaining provi sions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect uoIpnpo u Chapter KD Introduction PIONEER AVIC Z110BT for Canada THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AS THE ENDCUSER AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA ING PIONEER PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS YOu AGREE 1O BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE MENT THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER 5 COUPPLIERS ANDYOGURIJSE GF TRE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT Refer to page 14 IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO DUCTS INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TOBE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE MENT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non transferable non exclusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products the Software and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your busi ness only on such Pione
127. ay Number One If there are multiple items that correspond to the name you gave the list screen ap pears In this case touch the item you want to select from the list Search for POI in vicinity In this example you want to search for a POI and set it as your destination 1 Press the MODE button to display the map screen or the AV operation screen 2 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations A list of commands for voice operation ap pears After a message the beep indicates that the system is ready to accept your voice command Say a command after this beep 3 Say I need directions A message prompting you to select a search by address or by POI appears 4 Say Point of interest A message prompting the next operation is given Your Navigation System with Voice 5 Say acommand according to the mes sage displayed on the screen O When the list of candidates with number appears say the number that you want to select When you select the entry next to 1 say Number One O If there are multiple items that correspond to the name you gave the list screen ap pears In this case touch the item you want to select from the list Calling the entry on Contacts A method for dialing the entry named Nancy is described here along with an operational ex ample 1 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations 2 Say Call Nancy to make a call A message
128. aying discs with compressed audio files and audio data CD DA re peat play is performed within the cur rently playing data session even if Disc is selected Play tracks in a random order Touching Random switches between On and Off When using ROM the tracks in the current repeat play range are randomly played O If you turn Random to On when the repeat play range is set to Track the re peat play range changes to Folder automatically 3 Scan folders and tracks Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track Scan play is performed in the current repeat play range and Off When you find the track you want touch Scan to turn scan play off O After completion of track or folder scan ning normal playback of the tracks will begin again O If you turn Scan to On when the re peat play range is set to Track the re peat play range changes to Folder automatically O If you turn Scan to On while the re peat play range is set to Disc scan play is performed for only the first tracks of each folder Uses Sound Retriever function Sound Retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound Each touch of Sound Retriever changes the setting as follows e MODE 1 Activates Sound Retriever function e MODE 2 Activates Sound Retriever function e Off Deactivates Sound Retriever function O MODE 2 is more e
129. back Touch I gt during playback Each time you touch IIb you move ahead D 2 one frame To return to normal playback touch II Repeating play O With some discs images may be unclear Each touch of Repeat changes the setting during frame by frame playback as follows e Disc Plays throughout the current disc Slow motion playback e Title Repeats just the current title This lets you slow down playback speed e Chapter Repeats just the current chapter 1 Touch and hold I gt until 1 is dis played during playback The icon mp is displayed and forward slow motion playback begins Chapter EET Playing a DVD Video O Ifyou perform chapter title search fast forward fast reverse or slow motion playback the repeat play range changes to Disc O This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped 2 Selecting audio output When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM audio you can switch the audio output Touch L R Select repeatedly until the de sired audio output appears in the display Each touch of L R Select changes the set tings as follows e L R Left and right e L Left e R Right e Mix Mixing left and right O This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped 3 DVD setup adjustments gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup menu on page 130 m 122 En Chapter Playing a DVD VR disc 20 You c
130. be construed as constituting an endorsement by Statistics Canada of such product The use of this material is subject to the terms of a Li cense Agreement You will be held liable for any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material As of the Effective Date the copyright notice for all third party brand icons the Brand Icons are located in the operator s manual included in the Licensed Products As of the Effective Date the copyright notice with logo for infoUSA Inc is Data by infoUSA Copyright 2009 All Rights Reserved As for Map Version Tele Atlas Rel 07 2008 Chapter Introduction cH morning only but you arrive later it would be Important Safety Information WARNING Do not attempt to install or service your navi gation system by yourself Installation or servi cing of the navigation system by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traffic regulations Before using your navigation system be sure to read and fully understand the following safety information risk of electric shock or other hazards J Read the entire manual before operating e f liquid or foreign matter should get inside this navigation system this naviga
131. been stopped 126 En Chapter Playing a DivX video 21 You can play a DivX disc using the built in drive of the navigation system This section de scribes that operations Reading the screen oo w04 W03 MPEG A ra iiair O Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows the digital sound format surround sound format currently selected Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file Current time D Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number currently se lected Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type such as Mch Multi channel 9 Subtitle number indicator Shows the subtitle number currently selected Repeat range indicator Shows which repeat range has been selected m Using the touch panel keys Playback screen page1 D m04 E03 MPEG A eF eal 2ch D 04 amp 03 MPEG A eF el 2ch d O With some discs the icon may be dis played meaning that the operation is not valid Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 129 2 Switch the media file type played When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch be tw
132. cation that you choose to visit before your destination a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints and the destination WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation m xipueddy Appendix YE SC C SSC lt CSTTC S Specifications General Rated power SOUTCe ns ssesenenn 14 4 V DC allowable voltage range 10 8 V to 15 1 V DC Grounding SYSTEM a esseesseesses Negative type Maximum current consumption EEA 10 0 A Dimensions W x H x D Chassi S iain 178mm x 100mm x 165 mm Tin X 3 7 8in x 6 1 2 in NOS Eiun aunn 170mm x 96mm x 17 mm 6 3 4 in x 3 3 4in x 5 8 in NANG E nnana 2 43 kg 6 3 Ibs NAND flash memory wees 4GB Navigation GPS Receiver SyS lEn AE L1 C Acode GPS SPS Standard Positioning Service Reception SYSTEM n v 32 channel multi channel reception system Reception frequency 1575 42 MHz Sensitivity geteatdveccaicattosseess 143 dBm typ Position update frequency ea n ia il Approx once per second GPS antenna AMENNA inna Micro strip flat antenna right handed helical polari zation Antenna cable css 5 0m 16ft 5in Dimensions W x H x D RESE R EEEE omelets 33mm x 15mm x 36mm 1 1 4in x 5 8in x 1 3 8 in Wert neenon ians 96 g 0 2 Ibs Display Screen size aspect ratio 7 inch wide 16 9 effective display area 159mm x 84mm ICG anaa e n ehi 384 0
133. cene and starting playback from a specified time on the next page 4 Skip forward or backward as 40 gsn Wiod sajly OapiA HulAeld En 137 Chapter ED Playing video files from USB or SD Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next 3 To return to the previous screen touch file Touching ke once skips to the start of Detail the current file Touching again will skip to the A A ar fara Searching for a specific scene Touch and hold maa or gt gt to fast rewind and starting playback from a or fast forward specified time There is no sound on fast reverse or for You can search for a desired scene by specify ward ing the time O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 1 Touch Search Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 6 Hide the touch panel keys Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again D Stop playback Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the external storage device USB SD 2 Touch the keys to input the target num ber or time and then touch Enter e Jo select 5 minutes 03 seconds touch 5 Playing by selecting from the pann lel Sano Enter orae title list e o select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 1 min 0 0 and Enter in order You can select and play the title you want from e To select 100 minutes 05 sec
134. cense to use the software installed on the Pioneer products the Software and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your busi ness only on such Pioneer products You shall not copy reverse engineer translate port modify or make derivative works of the Software You shall not loan rent disclose publish sell assign lease sublicense market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engi neering disassembly decompilation or any C10 En KD Introduction other means You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other per sons or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copy right trade secret patent and other proprie tary ownership rights in the Software The Software is copyrighted and may not be cop ied even if modified or merged with other pro ducts You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend con tained in or on the Software You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Li cense Agreement
135. ch ANT CTRL on the AV System Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AN Sys tem Settings menu on this page Touching ANT CTRL switches between Radio and Power O Regardless of whether Radio or Power is selected turning off the ignition switch will cause the antenna to automatically re tract or turn off Chapter Customizing preferences 32 Changing the wide screen mode Touch Wide Mode on the AV System Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sys tem Settings menu on the previous page Each touch of Wide Mode changes the set ting as follows e Full full A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only enabling you to enjoy a 4 3 TV picture normal picture without any Omissions e Cinema cinema A picture is enlarged by the same propor tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direc tion and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical di rection ideal for a cinema sized picture wide screen picture where captions lie outside the frame e Zoom zoom A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the same pro portion both vertically and horizontally ideal for a cinema sized picture wide screen picture e Normal normal A 4 3 picture is displayed normally giving you no sense of disparity since its propor tions are the same as that of the normal picture Different settings can be stored for each video source
136. cies you have already saved by using P1 to P6 Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 2 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to set the sen sitivity There are two levels of sensitivity for AM Level 1 2 O The level 2 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations m Ny opea ay Buisn Chapter 16 HD Radio Reception You can listen to the radio by using the naviga tion system This section describes operations for HD Radio reception O For details concerning operation refer to the HD Radio tuner s operation manual Touch Digital Radio on the AV Source menu to display the Digital Radio screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Reading the screen D FM 1 oP 4 Th FM1i 4 ICRT HD1 f 100 1 MHz D ap cHa O A OE i lt Seek gt FM1 4 ICRT AD1 1 4 Disp Band Preset Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 FM2 FM3 or AM 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected 4 Multicasting indicator Shows the number of multicast channels in the curre
137. code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protec tive of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run
138. consumption information for calculating the fuel cost on page 96 4 Route calculation condition Touch OK Sets the displayed route as your route and starts the route guidance Touch KS The message confirming whether to cancel the calculated route appears Touch Yes to cancel the calculated route and then the map screen appears Display multiple routes You can select a desired route from multiple route options Calculated routes are shown in different colors O If you set waypoints you cannot use the multiple route option 1 Touch Multiple Route The Multiple Route Option screen appears 2 Touch to Gi Another route is displayed 3 Touch OK Route confirmation screen appears Modifying the route calculation conditions You can modify the conditions for route calcu lation and recalculate the current route 1 Touch Options on the Route confir mation screen The Route Options screen appears Route Options Route Condition Avoid Toll Road Avoid Ferry Avoid Freeway Time restrictions Learning Route 2 Touch the desired items to change the route calculation conditions and then touch OK The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears Items that users can operate Settings marked with an asterisk show that these are default or factory settings Route Condition This setting controls how the route should be calculate
139. creen that normally appears when you play the AV source Touching the icon on the top left corner displays the AV Source menu O To return to the previous screen touch Operating list screens e g POI list 4 C ee Irvine Station Santa Fe Railr gt DH 40 6mi SA Irvine Metrolink 40 6mi Corona Metrolink Station 41 8mi Metrolink Pedley Station 45 5mi Lancaster Station 45 6mi Camarillo Amtrak Station 45 7mi Screen title Touching or Y on the scroll bar scrolls through the list and allows you to view the re maining items Returns the previous screen 4 Listed items Touching an item on the list allows you to nar row down the options and proceed to the next operation DE It all of the characters cannot be displayed within the displayed area touching the key to the right of the item allows you to see remain ing characters Shortcut Menu Registering your favorite menu items in short cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis tered menu screen by a simple touch on the Shortcut Menu screen En su s NUSW uoepneu 34 sn 0 MOH Chapter How to use the navigation menu screens Selecting the Shortcut O Up to 15 menu items can be registered in shortcuts 1 Press the HOME button repeatedly to display the Shortcut Menu screen 2 Touch Shortcut The Short Cut Selection screen appears Scroll bar 3 Touch the
140. ctric shock Be less they have read and understood the op sure to consult your dealer or the nearest erating instructions authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal 1 Never use this navigation system to route inspection adjustments or repairs to hospitals police stations or similar facil e Do not allow this product to come into contact ities in an emergency Stop using any func with liquids Electrical shock could result tions relating to the hands free phone and Also damage to the product smoke and over please call 91 l heating could result from contact with liquids J Route and guidance information displayed by this equipment is for reference purposes A only It may not accurately reflect the latest CAUTION permissible routes road conditions one e When a route is calculated the route and way streets road closures or traffic restric voice guidance for the route are automatically tions set Also for day or time traffic regulations O Traffic restrictions and advisories currently only information about traffic regulations ap plicable at the time when the route was calcu lated is shown One way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration For example if a street is open during the in force should always take precedence over guidance given by the navigation sys tem Always obey current traffic restric tions even if the navigation system provides contrary advice uoIpnpo u En 23 Failure
141. d Touch and hold ka or gt gt to fast reverse or fast forward O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 7 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause Shuffle All All songs except for the track in Audio books and Podcasts in your iPod can be played randomly O To cancel the random play switch Shuffle on the Function menu to the Off Browsing for a song Touch an item on list to search for a song and play it on your iPod Narrowing down listed songs 1 Touch your desired category tab to dis play the song or track list Playlists playlists e Genres genres e Artists artists e Albums albums e Podcasts podcasts The search screen is displayed All Alternative amp Punk Blues Jazz Latin 2 Touching 4 or Y switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list 3 Touch the item that you want to refine Refine the item until the track title is displayed on the list pod pod ue Bulsn en 141 O Touching All on the list includes all op tions in the current list For example if you touch AIl after touching Artists you can proceed to the next screen with all artists in the list selected After you select Artists Albums or Genres go on to touch one of the list to start playing the first songs in the selected list and display the next options m Touch and hold the item that
142. d may not be output from the speakers e f private mode is selected on the cellular phone hands free phoning may be dis abled Registration and connection e Cellular phone operations vary depending on the type of cellular phone Refer to the 92 En instruction manual that came with your cel lular phone for detailed instructions e With cellular phones phone book transfer may not work even though your phone is paired with the navigation system In that case disconnect your phone perform pair ing again from your phone to the naviga tion system and then perform the phone book transfer Making and receiving calls e You may hear a noise in the following situa Hons When you answer the phone by using the button on the phone When the person on the other end of line hangs up the phone e f the person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo decrease the volume level for hands free phoning This may reduce the echo e With some cellular phones even if you press the accept button on the cellular phone when a call comes in hands free phoning may not be performed e The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in the phone book When one phone number is registered under different names the name that comes first in the phone book is displayed e f the phone number of the received call is not registered in the phone book
143. d by taking into account the time or the distance or the main road Determines which condition takes priority for route calculation Ej Fast Calculates a route with the shortest travel time to your destination as a priority 6 Short Calculates a route with the shortest distance to your destination as a priority W Main Road Calculate a route that passes major arterial road as a priority UO1 eUl SAap ANOA 0 3 NO1 e HuIzz sS Chapter KD Setting a route to your destination Avoid Toll Road This setting controls whether toll roads in cluding toll areas should be taken into ac count g off Calculate a route that may include toll roads including toll areas H 0n Calculate a route that avoids toll roads includ ing toll areas O The system may calculate a route that in cludes toll road even if On is selected Avoid Ferry This setting controls whether ferry crossings should be taken into account E3 Off Calculate a route that may include ferries On Calculate a route that avoids ferries O The system may calculate a route that in cludes ferry way even if On is selected Avoid Freeway This setting controls whether freeways may be included in the route calculation A Off Calculate a route that may include freeways V On Calculate a route that avoids freeways O The system may calculate a route that in cludes freeway even if On is selected Time r
144. d in the U S and other countries iPhone Works with J iPhone Works with iPhone means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect spe cifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc iTunes iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries m Using the LCD screen correctly Handling the LCD screen e When the LCD screen is subjected to direct sunlight for a long period of time it will be come very hot resulting in possible da mage to the LCD screen When not using this navigation system avoid exposing it to direct sunlight as much as possible e The LCD screen should be used within the temperature ranges shown in Specifica tions e Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures higher or lower than the operating tem perature range because the LCD screen may not operate normally and could be da maged e The LCD screen is exposed in order to in crease its visibility within the vehicle Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage It Appendix Appendix OS e Do not push the LCD screen with excessive force as this may scratch it e Never touch the LCD screen with anything besides your finger when operating the Touch panel functions The LCD
145. d to reproduce and use any part or the whole of this map in any form without permission from the copyright owner If the local traffic regulations or conditions deviate from this data follow the local traf fic regulations such as signs indications etc and conditions such as construction weather etc The traffic regulation data used in the map database applies only to standard sized passenger vehicles Note that regulations for larger vehicles motorbikes and other non standard vehicles are not included in the database 22 En Copyright Notices for North American data Tele Atlas MultiNet USA and Canada data As of the Effective Date the copyright notice for Tele Atlas MultiNet USA and Canada is NOTICE 2006 2008 Tele Atlas All rights reserved This material is proprietary and the subject of copyright protection and other intellectual property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of selected Statistics Canada computer files under Agreement number 6776 The product includes information copied with permission from Canadian authorities including Cana da Post Corporation and GeoBase and De partment of Natural Resources Canada All rights reserved The product is sourced in part trom Geography Division Statistics Canada 2006 Road Network File RNF 92 500 XWE XWEF The incorporation of data sources from Statistics Canada within this product shall not
146. dance volume of navigation O When set to guidance is output When set to J no guidance is output e Phone Ringtone This setting controls the incoming ring tone volume e Phone Voice This setting controls the incoming voice vo lume C1 Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust ments are related to the cellular phone fea turing Bluetooth technology No adjustment is needed when the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is not connected O Volume of the AV source is adjusted by the VOL button gt For details refer to Checking part names and functions on page 29 5 To finish the setting touch OK Changing the splash screen You can change the splash screen to the other images stored in the navigation system 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Splash Screen The Select Splash Screen screen appears 3 Touch the image to use as the splash screen from the list The image is displayed on the screen 4 Touch OK The image is set as the splash screen and the System Settings screen returns Changing to the splash screen stored in the SD memory card You can change the splash screen that ap pears when the navigation system starts Copy your chosen image to the SD memory card and select the image to import O Splash screen images should be used with in the following formats BMP or JPEG Tiles Allowable horizontal and vertical size are 2592 pixels x 1
147. des the Quick Access menu dew y asn 0 MOH Chapter KD Customizing the map screen settings The general settings related with a map screen can be customized To customize the map screen display the Map Settings screen 1 Display the Top Menu screen 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears fl Settings Menu AV Sound ey M AV Settings System Settings 7 1 Setting Replicator Navi Settings i Map Settings Bluetooth Settings Screen Off 3 Touch Map Settings The Map Settings screen appears il Map Settings Displayed Quick Access iew M Info Selection View Mode Overlay POI Day Night Display AV Guide nie Road Color S Setting the Item on the Map Screen 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch Displayed Info The Displayed Information screen appears i Displayed Information 7 Close Up View City Map City Map Barrier Show Traffic Incident Bluetooth Connected Current Street Name 44 En Setting Close Up View This setting enables switching to an enlarged map around the point where your vehicle is approaching an intersection entrance exit of freeway or a junction Touch Close Up View Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Switches to an enlarged map Displays the close up view with the 2D map e Off Does not switch to an enlarged
148. diminish ratings agencies role WSJ NEW YORK Reuters The U S Securities and Exchange Commission is planning rules to make it possible for U S money market funds to invest in short term debt without regards to ratings put on Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when the new informa tion is received 4 Touch J or to scroll the list Browsing stock quotes Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list Although the stock quote displayed onscreen is updated about 40 minutes approx these prices are not realtime values It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to become available under the following condi tions When you use MSN Direct for the first time When you have not performed this function previously around the current area After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 Selecting stock symbols Up to 30 stock symbols can be selected 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Stocks The Stock Info screen appears O The seven stock indices is always selected and displayed on the bottom of the list 78 En 3 Touch Add The Stock Info screen appears 4 Enter the stock symbol that you want to select and then touch OK The selected stock symbol is added to the Stock Info screen O Arrow in the left of each item ind
149. dio Do not connect anything other than the USB memory device The sequence of audio files on USB mem ory For USB memory the sequence is different from that of USB memory device SD memory card and SDHC memory card O For more details about SD memory card compatibility with this navigation system refer to Specifications on page 214 x pu ddy en 197 Appendix MD Appendx SSC C 73 gt PTTSTS Handling guidelines and supplemental information This system is not compatible with Multi Media Card MMC Copyright protected files cannot be played back Notes specific to DivX files Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera tion Unauthorized DivX files may not operate properly DRM rental files cannot be operated until playing back is started The navigation system corresponds to a DivX file display of up to 1590 minutes 43 seconds Search operations beyond this time limit are prohibited DivX VOD Tile playback requires supplying the ID code of this navigation system to the DivX VOD provider Regarding the ID code refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra tion code on page 165 Plays all versions of DivX video including DivX 6 with standard playback of DivX media files For more details about Divx visit the follow ing site http www divx com DivX subtitle files Srt format subtitle files with the extension st can be used Only one subtit
150. displayed Touch Jump to switch the station and you can view the game information If you touch Stay the channel does not switch O Alerts may not be provided depending on the status of the navigation system 4J9UN SNIMIS 94 Bbuisn Displaying Game Information An alert will be displayed when a game with the team you selected is about to start or is currently under way You can also display game information and changes to the broad cast channel O The Game Information function is available when Alert is On in Game Alert 1 Touch Game Info 2 Touch Prev or Next to view the game score information which is registered The game score will be updated automati cally Touch Tune To to switch to the channel that broadcasts the displayed game T If you have not made any team selections Not Set is displayed When no games involving your favorite teams are currently being played NO GAME is displayed En 157 Chapter ED Using AV input You can display video image output by AV1 Using the touch panel keys Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi gation system For details of the connection Touch the screen to display the touch method refer to Installation Manual panel keys A CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking b
151. e Repeat just the current file Folder Repeat the current folder O If you skip the file forward or backward when the repeat play range in File the repeat play range changes to Folder 2 Changes the screen size of video If a video file is played you can select the display mode between normal and Tull screen Each touch of Video Output Setting changes the setting as follows e Normal Video files appear in normal as 40 gsn Wo sajly OapIA Hulhe d Size e Full Video files appear in a full screen Using the USB interface cable for iPod en ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga tion system A USB interface cable for iPod CD IU50V sold separately is required for connection Starting procedure Connect your iPod The source changes and then playback will start gt For details refer to Connecting your iPod on page 33 O If the iPod is already connected touch iPod on the AV Source menu gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 O No video output if iPod is selected as AV source check the setting in AV1 Input on the AV System Settings menu gt For details refer to Setting video input 7 AV1 on page 162 Reading the screen Music D O00 born 7 Artists Albums Podcasts Video MENU Shuffle All We 5 58 gt Music PEL Tae Oe nw ANAE a Gaia aa ae CAS
152. e Repeat play Indicator Meaning All tracks in the current disc Disc Repeat are played repeatedly This is the default condition Track Repeat The current track is played repeatedly Indicator Meaning All tracks in the current disc Disc Random l are played in random order The beginning of each track is played for about 10 sec onds Disc Scan gt For more information refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track Current time 6 Song number indicator Shows the track number currently played and the total number of tracks in the current re peat range D Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing when available Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing when available Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track when available saD Oipne bulKeld Using the touch panel keys Touch panel keys gt We cD Now Playing 01 10 gt Disc Repeat D Pioneer Time 01 AVIC Shuffle All 9 Navigation List Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 2 Switch the media file type played gt For details refer to Switch the media file type played on page 116 3 Skip the track forward or backward Chapter Playing audio CDs Touching
153. e Menu gt For details refer to Displaying the Phone Menu on page 84 Dialing GOOG 411 starts 2 You can now use the GOOG 411 phone service For details about GOOG 411 service and avail ability contact Google Dialing the entry in the Favorites You can make a call to the entry registered in the Favorites 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 3 Touch next to the location that you want to make a call The Edit Favorite screen appears 4 Touch Call to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch fm 5 Touch fj to end the call Dialing a facility s phone number You can make a call to facilities with phone number data O You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch POI The POI Search screen appears 3 Search for the POI The POI List screen appears gt For details concerning operations refer to Searching for Points of Interest POI on page 60 4 Touch F next to the POI that you want to call The Detailed POI Information screen ap pears 5 Touch Call to make a call To cancel the call after the system starts dial ing touch Ba 6 Touch to end the call Dialing from the map You can make a call by selecting the icon of a registered location or a POI icon from the
154. e mile default Show distance in miles e Mile amp Yard Show distance in miles and yards e km Show distance in kilometers Touch No Cancels the setting Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle When calculating the expected time of arrival and the travel time to the destination set the average speed for the freeway or ordinary roads using and 1 Display the Regional Settings screen 2 Touch Speed The Average Speed Settings screen ap pears 100 En il Average Speed Settings Minor Ordinary Road Major Ordinary Road Freeway 3 Touch or to set the speed O The estimated time of arrival is not necessa rily estimated based on this speed value 4 Touch OK The settings are completed Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone The sound volume for the navigation can be set You can separately set the volume of the route guidance and the beep sound 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Volume The Volume Settings screen appears l Volume Settings Beep Guidance Phone Ringtone Phone Voice 3 Touch the key next to Beep Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default A beep sounds e Off The beep sound is muted 4 Touch or H to set their volume On this screen you can operate the following items e Guidance Chapter Customizing preferences 13 This setting controls the gui
155. e Using the System The video output terminal REAR MONITOR OUTPUT is for connection of a display to en able passengers in the rear seats to watch video images Important Serial Number The serial number of this device is located on the bottom of this product For your own security and convenience be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card A WARNING NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that g enables the driver to watch video images while Failure to operate driving Should the navigation system fail to operate properly contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station To avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this product Using this product without run ning the engine can drain the battery A WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position Rear view camera With an optional rear view camera you are able to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on trailers or backing into a tight parking spot After sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor trom which you purchased the product for after sales service including warranty conditions or any other information In case the necessary information is not available please contact the companies listed below Please do not ship your product to the compa nies at the addresses listed below for repair without making advance cont
156. e cable for iPod en ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga tion system A USB interface cable for iPod CD IU50V sold separately is required for connection 1 Pull out the USB storage device after checking that no data is being accessed USB interface cable for iPod USB connector O For more details about iPod compatibility with this navigation system refer to the in formation on our website O Connection via USB hub is not possible 2 Connect your iPod Disconnecting your iPod Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod after checking that no data is being ac cessed Flow from startup to termination 1 Start the engine to boot up the system After a short pause the splash screen comes on for a few seconds To protect the LCD screen from damage be sure to touch the touch panel keys with your finger and gently touch the screen En Chapter uol e1ado diseg G3 Chapter KD Basic operation 2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi 4 Read the disclaimer carefully checking nate the system its details and then touch OK if you The navigation system is also turned off J agree to the conditions CAUTION On first time sta rtup ee wastalend eae fone Dero ATA Ka ote substitute for your attentiveness judgement and care while When you use the navigation system for the ad eine a Sea eee ied first time select the language that you want to Soli hich tee ddl barn oar La paeary th ches
157. e fol lowing box Doo MSN Direct Status To active renew the MSN Direct receiver go to http www msndirect com pioneer or Call 1 866 658 7032 You will need the product key below XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Firmware Update Chapter Browsing information on MSN Direct dH Subscribing to the MSN Direct Although the MSN Direct service regularly up service dates gas price information the information Within two days of completing the subscription provided may not necessarily correspond to ac execute Activating the MSN Direct function tual gas prices Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on the previous page 1 Access the following URL and read the It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be description come available under the following conditions http www msndirect com pioneer When you use MSN Direct for the first time When you have not performed this function previously around the current area After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days 2 Be sure to check the coverage area and other availabilities of MSN Direct on the web page 3 Goto the page for activation and enter your product key 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 4 Follow the directions on the web page The MSN Direct screen appears to complete the subscription MSN Direct Activating the MSN Direct function 4 g After the online subscription complete the ac
158. e in memory touch and hold a preset tuning key P1 to P6 until the pre set number e g P C 1 appears The selected radio station has been stored in memory 2 The next time you touch the same pre set tuning key P1 to P6 the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory O You can also use lt and gt to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 Using the Function menu 1 Touch AM on the AV Source menu to display the AM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch EJ AM am Function Storing the strongest broadcast fre quencies gt For details refer to this page 2 Tuning in strong signals gt For details refer to this page Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you auto matically store the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 and once stored there you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key Touch Start to turn BSM on BSM begins to flash While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength When this is complete BSM stops flashing To cancel the storage process touch Stop T Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequen
159. e is located are displayed 2 Touch the folder that you want to view b01 D01 MP3 EF Current ROOT AVIC Pioneer Time May Media Pioneer Time Apr 44 I I Rock Shuffle All 01 Go straight mp3 02 Turn right mp3 Detail The track currently playing is highlighted Touching 4 or Y switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list Touching displays the content of the upper folder parent folder If the uppermost folder is listed cannot be used 3 Touch the track you want to play 0 To cancel the list screen touch Detail Using the Function menu 1 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the ROM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Chapter Playing music files on ROM 18 2 Touch EJ Touching Scan switches between On o Function Repeat Random Sound Retriever Repeating play Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e Disc Repeats all compressed audio files e Track Repeats just the current track e Folder Repeats the current folder O If you select another folder during repeat play the repeat play range changes to Disc O If you perform fast forward rewind dur ing Track the repeat play range changes to Folder O When Folder is selected it is not pos sible to play back a subfolder of that folder O When pl
160. e parking brake is not applied Connect the parking brake cord and apply the parking brake The backlight of the LCD panel is Turn on the backlight Page 104 turned off 182 En Appendix Appendix OGG Symptom Cause Action Reference Rear display picture disap The source disc being listened toin Before ejecting the disc switch the source pears the navigation system has been This problem may occur when certain con ejected nection methods are used There is a problem with the Rear Check the Rear display and its connection display for example a faulty wiring connection An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source the rear display is selected Nothing is displayed and the The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear touch panel keys cannot be is incorrect view camera used The shift lever was placed in R Select the correct polarity setting for Back when the rear view camera was not Camera Page 101 connected There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from Perform touch panel calibration Page 102 touch panel keys are touched or the actual positions that respond to a different key responds your touch for some reason The external storage device The USB storage device has been Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off USB SD cannot be used removed immediately after plugging the engine Turn the ign
161. e settings will be memorized in Custom e A Custom2 curve can be created common to all sources If you make adjustments when Custom2 curve is selected the Cus tom2 curve will be updated e The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized for each of the source selected but one curve is shared for the following sources CD ROM DVD V DVD VR DivX AM and FM EXT1 and EXT2 AV1 and AV2 SD and USB XM and SIRIUS e The different source volume level can be set between iPod and USB e When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve 1 Touch EQ on the AV Sound Settings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch one of the keys to select a curve that you want to use as the basis of custo mizing 3 Touch Customize 4 Touch the frequency that you want to adjust the level 5 Touch A or Y to adjust the level of the equalizer band Each time you touch A or W the level of the equalizer band increases or decreases sadudsajoid Hulziwio sn5 En 167 Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low and high sound ranges at low volume 1 Touch Loudness on the AV Sound Settings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on pa
162. e sure Automatic is selected Page 48 and nighttime De a The orange white lead is not con Check the connection nected The screen is too bright An improper value has been set on Check the settings Page 160 Brightness The display is very dim The vehicle s light is turned ON and Read about Day Night Display setting and Automatic is selected on Day if desired select Day Page 48 Night Display An improper value has been seton Check the settings Page 160 Brightness No sounds of AV source are pro The volume level is low Adjust the volume level duced l The attenuator or mute is on Turn the attenuator or mute off The volume level will not rise A speaker lead is disconnected Check the connection The volume of navigation gui VOL button is used to adjust Turn the volume up or down using Volume dance and beeps cannot be ad the volume on the System Settings menu Page 100 justed The person on the otherend of The voice from the person on the Use the following methods to reduce the the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo conversation due to an echo from the speakers and then picked Lower the volume on the receiver up by the microphone again creat Have both parties pause slightly before ing an echo speaking There s no picture The parking brake cord is not con Connect the parking brake cord and apply nected the parking brake Th
163. e terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright no tices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete correspond ing machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the applica tion to use the modified definitions b w Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library funct
164. e works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Li brary the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regard less of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this Li cense 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU Gen eral Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU Gen eral Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is ir
165. ears Favorites HOME E MY PARENTS E my SISTER EJ MY BROTHER E PUSA E MY OFFICE S a gt gt E Delete Add 3 Touch the entry you want The searched location appears on the map screen Searching for POls by using the data on the SD memory card Creating a customized POI is possible by using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is available separately on your PC AVIC FEEDS will be available on our website Stor ing the customized POI properly and inserting the SD memory card enables the system to use the data for searches 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Destination Menu screen 3 Touch AVIC FEEDS POl s are divided into several categories 4 Touch the category you want The Select POI screen appears 62 En 5 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Ls Selecting a location you searched for recently The places that you have searched for in the past are automatically stored in History O If no location is stored in Destination His tory you cannot select History If you perform a route calculation you can select History O History can store up to 100 locations If the entries reach the maximum the new entry overwrites the oldest one 1 Display the Destination
166. ect Sub W Switching the muting attenuation timing You can mute the AV source volume or attenu ate the output signal This setting is invalid for the mute signal has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit Even if this setting is Off the navigation sys tem will mute or attenuate the audio source volume when the signal is output via MUTE lead Touch Mute on the AV System Set tings menu Each touch of Mute changes the settings as follows e Guide Tel VR The volume is muted or at tenuated according to the following condi tions sadudsajaid Hulziwio sn5 en 163 When the navigation outputs the gui dance voice When you use a cellular phone via Blue tooth technology dialing talking in coming call When the voice recognition mode is ac tivated e Tel VR The volume is muted or attenu ated according to the following conditions When you use acellular phone via Blue tooth technology dialing talking in coming call When the voice recognition mode is ac tivated e Off The volume does not change O AV source volume returns to normal when the corresponding action is ended Switching the muting attenuation level You can select the muting attenuation level of Mute This setting is also effective for a mute signal that has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit O This menu ts not available
167. ected When the system restarts the sys tem automatically attempts to reconnect the previously connected cellular phone Even when the connection is severed for some reason the system automatically re connects the specified cellular phone ex cept when the connection is severed due to cellular phone operation Registering your Bluetooth devices You need to register your devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology when you con nect it for the first time A total of 5 devices can be registered Three registration methods are available e Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices e Searching for a specified Bluetooth device e Pairing from your Bluetooth devices O If you try to register more than 5 devices the system will ask you to select one of the registered devices to delete gt For details refer to Deleting a registered device on page 82 To register your Bluetooth devices display the Bluetooth Settings screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth Settings screen appears Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices The system searches for available Bluetooth devices near the navigation system displays them in a list and registers them for connec tion 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices For some Bluetooth devices no specific action is nec
168. een media files types to play Touch Media repeatedly to switch between the following media file types CD audio data CD DA ROM com pressed audio file DivX DivX video files O This touch panel key appears only when playing a disc containing a mixture of various media Tile types 3 Skip forward or backward En oapia XAIq e BbulAeld Chapter ED Playing a DivX video Touching gt gt skips to the start of the next file Touching ke once skips to the start of the current file Touching again will skip to the previous file O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt gt button 4 Playback and Pause Touching gt H switches between playback and pause Switch the information Touching Disp changes the content of the in formation panel as follows Disc information display Current folder dis play File name display 6 Hide the touch panel keys Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again D Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the disc Switch next page of touch panel keys Stop playback Change audio tracks Multi audio Each touch of Audio switches between audio tracks di Change the subtitle Multi subtitle Each touch of S Title switches between the subtitle languages 2 Fast reverse or forward Touch lt or gt gt to perform fast reverse or forward If
169. efer to Using the Function menu on page 126 lt CM Skip CM Skip gt gt For details refer to Using the short time Skip function on page 125 3 Switch the playback mode gt For details refer to Switch the playback mode on page 125 4 Skip forward or backward Touching bl skips to the start of the next chapter Touching ka once skips to the start of the current chapter Touching it again will skip to the previous chapter O You can also perform these operations by using the TRK lt button Playback and Pause en 123 SIP HA GAC Bulkeld Touching gt H switches between playback and pause 6 Switch the display Touching Disp changes the information as follows Disc information display Repeat range dis play D Hide the touch panel keys Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the disc Switch next page of touch panel keys Stop playback di Change audio tracks Multi audio Each touch of Audio switches between audio tracks Display indications such as MPEG A and Mch indicate the audio system re corded on the DVD Depending on the setting playback may not use the same audio system as that indicated 2 Skip the title forward or backward Touching gt skips to the start of the next title Touching lt skips to the start of the p
170. elete Sylmar Park Sylmar Delete Foothill Blvd Los Angeles Delete Chapter Checking and modifying the current route You can check the route details You can also recalculate the route in different conditions 1 Display the Top Menu screen 2 Touch Destination The Destination Menu screen appears 3 Touch Route Overview The Route Overview screen appears Options Profile LX 05 Angeles Waypoints x 0n08m 5 7mi O Route Overview is active only when the route is set Checking the current itinerary You can check the route details 1 Display the Route Overview screen 2 Touch Profile The Route Profile screen appears Route Profile A S Los Angeles St N Los Angeles St US 101 N Hollywood Fwy US 101 N CA 2 N Hollywood Fwy US 101 N Hollywood Fwy US 101 N CA 170 N Hollywood Fwy O When a long distance route is calculated your navigation system may not be able to list all roads In this case the remaining roads will be shown in the list as you drive on m 54 En Editing waypoints You can edit waypoints locations you want to visit on the way to your destination and recal culate the route so that is passes through these locations To edit the waypoints display the Waypoints List screen 1 Display the Route Overview screen 2 Touch Waypoints The Waypoints List screen appears gt Waypoints List 1
171. eleted from the list 3 Touch OK on the Waypoints List screen The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears 4 Touch OK The map of the current position appears Sorting waypoints You can sort waypoints and recalculate the route O You cannot sort waypoints that you have al ready passed 1 Display the Waypoints List screen 2 Touch Sort The Sort Waypoints screen appears gt Sort Waypoints Griffith Park Los Angeles Thompson Ave Glendale Lankershim Blvd Sun amp Foothill Blvd Los Angeles Automatic 3 Touch the waypoint or destination Put them in the desired order Touch Automatic You can sort the destination and waypoints auto matically The system will show the nearest way point distance in a straight line from the current location as waypoint 1 and sort the other points including your destination in order of distance from the waypoint 1 Touch Clear The sorting waypoints is canceled 4 Touch OK The Waypoints List screen appears 5 Touch OK on the Waypoints List screen The route is recalculated and Route confir mation screen appears 6 Touch OK The map of the current position appears m Modifying the route calculation conditions The settings related to route calculation can be customized 1 Display the Route confirmation screen 2 Touch Options The Route Options
172. en 2 Touch Road Color Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e Blue default Changes to blue based road colors e Red Changes to red based road colors J Chapter Customizing the map screen settings 05 Changing the setting of navigation interruption screen Set whether to automatically switch to the na vigation screen from the AV operation screen when your vehicle approaches a guidance point such as an intersection while displaying a screen other than navigation 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch AV Guide Mode Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Switches from the audio operation screen to the navigation screen e Off Does not switch the screen m Selecting Quick Access Select items to display on the map screen In the list displayed on screen the items with red checks are displayed on the map screen Touch the item you want to display and then touch OK when a red check appears You can select up to five items 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch Quick Access Selection The Quick Access Selection screen appears 3 Touch the item that you want to set in Quick Access You can select the following items O Settings marked with an asterisk show that these are default or factory settings e E Registration Register information on the location indi cated by the scroll cursor to Favorites
173. en password Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser vice Station J en 177 Restoring the default setting Resets various settings registered to the navi gation system and restores them to the default or factory settings O Some data remains Be sure to read Return ing the navigation system to the default or factory settings first 1 Display the System Settings screen gt For details refer to Displaying the System Settings screen on page 98 2 Touch Restore Factory Settings The message confirming whether to restore the settings appears 3 Touch Yes Returning the navigation system to the initial state You can return settings or recorded content to the default or factory settings 0 Some data remains Be sure to read Return ing the navigation system to the default or factory settings first 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the naviga tion system back on The splash screen appears 2 Press and hold the MODE button and the TRK lt button while splash screen ap pears The Select Items to Reset screen appears 3 Touch Clear user information The message confirming whether to erase all user data appears And then touch Yes to erase all user data Touch Reset Various settings registered to the navigation sys tem are reset to the
174. er mission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms 20 En and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condi tions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who
175. er products You shall not copy reverse engineer translate port modify or make derivative works of the Software You shall not loan rent disclose publish sell assign lease sublicense market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engi neering disassembly decompilation or any other means You shall not use the Software to 12 En operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other per SONS or entities Pioneer and its licensor s shall retain all copy right trade secret patent and other proprie tary ownership rights in the Software The Software is copyrighted and may not be cop ied even if modified or merged with other pro ducts You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend con tained in or on the Software You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Li cense Agreement 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS PIONEER AND ITS LI CENSOR S for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3 Pioneer and its licensor s shall be col lective
176. erating a DivX VOD registration code which you submit to your provider O This feature is available when the selected source is CD ROM DivX DVD V or DVD VR Touch DivX VOD on the AV System Settings menu Your 8 digit registration code is displayed O Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider m The AV Sound Settings menu options Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch AV Sound The AV Sound Settings screen appears s 2Uu 1 1d Hulziwio sn5 D AV Sound Settings DVD V FAD BAL 10 Loudness Sub Woofer Bass Booster Staging O You cannot make adjustments in the follow ing situations AV source is Off During muting attenuation O You cannot select SLA when the FM tuner is selected as the AV source Using balance adjustment You can select a fader balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats 1 Touch FAD BAL on the AV Sound Set tings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on the previous page When Sub W is selected in Rear SP Balance will be displayed instead of FAD BAL and front rear speaker balance cannot be adjusted gt Refer to Setting the rear output on page 163 2 Touch A or V to adj
177. es Before Using the System 25 Failureto operate 25 Visit Our Web site 26 Manual overview 26 Howto use this manual 26 Terminology 26 Definitions of terminology 27 Notice regarding video viewing 27 Notice regarding DVD Video viewing 27 Notice regarding MP3 file usage 27 iPod compatibility 27 Map coverage 28 Protecting the LCD panel and screen 28 C2 En Notes on internal memory 28 Before removing the vehicle battery 28 Data subjectto erasure 28 02 Basic operation Checking part names and functions 29 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 30 Inserting and ejecting a disc 30 Inserting a disc 31 Ejectingadisc 31 Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card 1 Inserting an SD memory card 31 EjectinganSD memory card 32 Plugging and unplugging a USB storage device 32 Plugging ina USB storage device 33 Unplugging a USB storage device 33 Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 33 Connecting youriPod 33 Disconnecting your iPod 33 Flow from startup to termination 33 On first time startup 34 Regular startup 34 How to use the navigation menu screens Screen switching overview 36 What you can do on each menu 37 Operating list screens e g POI list 37 Shortcut Menu 37 Selecting the Shortcut 38 Canceling the Shortcut 38 Displaying the rear view camera image 38 D How to use the map How to read the map screen 39 Displaying the AV information bar 40 Enlarged map of
178. essary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 3 Touch Registration The Nearby Device List screen appears il Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Select specific devices En 2JIA P Y OO AaN g 4 6ul DUUOD pue Hulia sIb3ay The system searches for devices featuring Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list if the device has found O Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order that the devices are found 4 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap pears in the list il Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Select specific devices My Phone 000E7B9AF636 Search Again O If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that you want to connect check that the device is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech nology connection 5 Touch the Bluetooth device name you want to register The message Please follow the instructions on your mobile phone appears l Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Please follow the instructions on your mobile phone Cancel Search Again 6 Enter the PIN code the default PIN code is 1111 using the Bluetooth device The device is registered in the navigation sys tem After the device is successfully registered the Bluetooth connection is established trom the n
179. estination Menu screen 2 Touch History The Destination History List screen ap pears 3 Touch Delete The Delete from History screen appears Ms Delete from History HOME PUSA MY OFFICE MY BROTHER MY SISTER MY PARENTS 4 Select the location you want to delete A check mark appears by the selected loca tion Delete from History HOME PUSA MY OFFICE MY BROTHER MY SISTER MY PARENTS Delete Touch AIl Selects all entries Touch None Displayed when all locations are selected Can cels all selected locations 5 Touch Delete A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 6 Touch Yes The data you selected is deleted Touch No Cancels the deletion Chapter SUO1 e90 HuljIpa pue Hulsa sibay Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct If you have an active subscription to MSN Direct service you can check and browse various information on your navigation system such as gas prices movie times weather conditions and traffic information The information will be updated periodically IMPORTANT To receive MSN Direct on an MSN Direct ready device you must be within an MSN Di rect coverage area see http www msndirect com pioneer for current coverage maps Cover age areas are affected by reception limitations of the FM network as well as other factors which may affect the ability to receive FM broadcasts Cove
180. estrictions This setting controls whether streets or bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer tain time should be taken into account O Ifyou want to set your route to avoid opened bridges select On O On Calculate a route while avoiding streets or bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer tain time Off Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric tions 52 En O The system may calculate a route that in cludes streets or bridges that are subject to traffic restrictions during a certain time even if On is selected A CAUTION If the time difference is not set correctly the navi gation system cannot consider traffic regulations correctly Set the time difference correctly Refer to Setting the time difference on page 99 Learning Route The system learns the travel history of your ve hicle for each road This setting controls whether or not the travel history should be taken into account Fal On Calculate the route with the travel history taken into account Off Calculate the route without the travel history taken into account Clear Clear the current travel history Checking the current itinerary You can check the route details Touch Profile on the Route confirma tion screen The Route Profile screen appears Route Profile A S Los Angeles St N Los Angeles St US 101 N Hollywood Fwy US 101 N CA 2 N Hollywood Fwy US 10
181. ettings AV Settings AV Sound S 7 fi Navi Settings Bluetooth Setting Settings Replicator S Screen Off Map Settings 4 Touch Set Password The password setting screen appears 5 Enter the password you want to set C 5to 16 characters can be entered for a password 6 Touch OK 7 Reenter the password to confirm the setting 8 Touch OK Password protection is applied O If you want to change the password cur rently set enter the current password and then enter the new one Entering the password On the password input screen you must enter the current password If you enter an incorrect password three times the screen is locked and operations using touch panel keys are dis abled 1 Enter the password 2 Touch OK The message The unit has been locked be cause an invalid password was entered three times Turn ACC off and on and enter your password appears if you entered the correct password and the navigation sys tem is unlocking Deleting the password The current password can be deleted 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings on the Top Menu 3 Touch Areat followed by Area2 and then touch and hold Area3 SUOI IUN 19410 4 Touch Clear password The password setting screen appears 5 Enter the current password 6 Touch OK 7 Touch Yes The message for deletion appears and then the current password is deleted Forgott
182. evice name on the list touch Other phones to search the devices available nearby 6 Touch the Bluetooth device name you want to register The message Please follow the instructions on your mobile phone appears i Nearby Device List Register from mobile phone Please follow the instructions on your mobile phone Cancel Search Again 7 Enter the PIN code the default PIN code is 1111 using the Bluetooth device The device is registered in the navigation sys tem After the device is successfully registered the Bluetooth connection is established trom the navigation system O If the registered device features HFP the hands free connection is made tooth Audio connection is made If the registered device features both HFP and A2DP the hands free connection is made and then the Bluetooth Audio con nection is made Pairing from your Bluetooth devices You can register the Bluetooth device by set ting the navigation system to standby mode T If the registered device features A2DP Blue and requesting connection from the Bluetooth device 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices For some Bluetooth devices no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 3 Touch Registration The Nearby Device List screen appears 4
183. fer to Selecting Quick Ac cess on page 49 O Items marked with an asterisk cannot be removed from Quick Access menu Chapter How to use the map 04 When the map is displayed touch JEJ S Figueroa St Quick Access menu iy Route Options Displayed when the map is not scrolled This item can be selected only during route gul dance You can modify the conditions for route calcu lation and recalculate the current route gt For details refer to Modifying the route cal culation conditions on page 55 Eg Destination Displayed when the map is scrolled Set the route to the place specified with the scroll cur Sor Registration Register information on the location indicated by the scroll cursor to Favorites gt For details refer to Registering a location by scroll mode on page 64 E Vicinity Search Find POls Points Of Interest in the vicinity of the scroll cursor gt For details refer to Searching for a nearby PO on page 60 EJ Overlay POI Displays icons for surrounding facilities POI on the map gt For details refer to Displaying POI on the map on page 46 Volume Displays the Volume Settings screen gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 100 Contacts Displays the Contacts List screen gt For details refer to Calling a number in the Contacts List on page 85 Close Hi
184. few minutes to read the following information about the conven tions used in this manual Familiarity with these conventions will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment e Buttons on your navigation system are de scribed in ALL CAPITAL BOLD lettering e g MENU button MAP button e tems in different menus screen titles and functional components are described in bold with double quotation marks e g Destination Menu screen or AV Source screen e Touch panel keys that are available on the screen are described in bold in brackets e g Destination Settings e Extra information alternatives and other notes are presented in the following for mat Sg O Ifthe home location has not been stored yet set the location first Chapter Introduction cH e References are indicated like this e g gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Definitions of terminology Front Display and Rear Display In this manual the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the Front Display Any additional op tional screen that is purchased for use in con junction with this navigation unit will be referred to as the Rear Display Video image Video image in this manual indicates mov ing images of DVD Video DivX iPod and any equipment that is connected to
185. ffective than MODE 1 INOW UO sayy Disnu Bured En 117 You can play a DVD Video using the built in drive of the navigation system This section de scribes operations for playing a DVD Video Reading the screen ee S05 01 Dolby D Dyo v C1 2ch G02 Eng Top Menu BookM Menu I4 w D 900 Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows which digital sound format Surround sound format has been selected Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the Current title 6 Current time D Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number and audio lan guage currently selected Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type such as Mch Multi channel 9 Subtitle number indicator Shows the subtitle number currently selected Subtitle language indicator Shows the subtitle language currently se lected di Viewing angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been selected m 118 En EET Playing a DVD Video Using the touch panel keys Playback screen page 1 H01 Dolby D 2ch G02 En tl Mee 12 59 i T Top Menu BookM a 701 Dolby D 2ch G02 En tl lt Tite gt O lt lt gt gt 8 Search Returnq Disp 8605 01 Dolby D 2ch G02 En
186. g amp 1 O With some discs the icon may be dis played meaning that the operation is inva lid Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 121 2 Display the DVD menu Chapter Playing a DVD Video 19 You can display the menu by touching Menu P E lt or gt gt opposite to key pushed or Top Menu while a disc is playing Touch for five seconds ing either of these keys again lets you start 3 Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from the location selected from the playback from a specified time menu For details refer to the instructions pro gt For details refer to Searching for a speci vided with the disc fic scene and starting playback from a 3 Skip forward or backward specified time on the next page Touching bl skips to the start of the next Perform an operation such as resuming chapter Touching kaa once skips to the that is stored on the disc start of the current chapter Touching it again When using a DVD that has a point recorded will skip to the previous chapter that indicates where to return to the DVD re O You can also perform these operations turns to the specified point and begins play by using the TRK lt gt button back from that point 4 Playback and Pause 5 Change the viewing angle Multi angle Touching gt H switches between playback Each touch of Angle switches between view lt and p
187. g in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch Local 2 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 3 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to set the sen sitivity There are four levels of sensitivity for FM Level 1 2 3 4 O The level 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker stations m En 107 Chapter ED Using the radio AM You can listen to the radio using this naviga tion system This section describes operations for radio AM Touch AM on the AV Source menu to display the AM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Reading the screen 00 Preset Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on 3 Signal level indicator 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected Frequency indicator Current time Using the touch panel keys Me 10 07 530 kHz lt Seek gt 6 Preset Display the Function menu 108 En gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 2 Select a preset channel lt or gt can be used to switch presets 3 Perform manual tuning To tune m
188. g overview on page 36 2 Touch EY J Function Repeat Random Sound Retriever M Repeating play Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e Disc Repeats the current disc e Track Repeats just the current track O If you perform track search or fast for ward or reverse track repeat playback is automatically canceled 2 Play tracks in a random order Touching Random switches between On and Off 3 Scan tracks of aCD Touching Scan switches between On and Off Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD When you find the track you want touch Scan to turn scan play off O After scanning is finished normal play back of the tracks will begin again 4 Uses Sound Retriever function Sound Retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound Each touch of Sound Retriever changes the setting as follows e MODE 1 Activates Sound Retriever function e MODE 2 Activates Sound Retriever function e Off Deactivates Sound Retriever function O MODE 2 is more effective than MODE 1 Chapter Playing music files on ROM 18 You can play a disc that contains compressed audio files using the built in drive of the navi gation system This section describes these operations O In the following description the MP3 WMA AAC files are collectively referred to as Compressed aud
189. g to a song on your Bluetooth audio player the playback of song continues to elapse O Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you connected to this navigation system operations on this navigation system to control the player may differ from those ex plained in this manual O When you are talking on a cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire less technology song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit is paused 146 En Touch Bluetooth Audio on the AV Source menu to display the Bluetooth Audio screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Reading the screen a E Connect My Phone Connect Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Device name 3 Bluetooth connection status indicator 4 Current time If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea tures AVRCP 1 3 the following items will be displayed e Track number indicator e Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the Current track e Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently play ing when available e Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing when available e Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track when available e Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi cates the current playback condition when
190. g to the splash screen stored inthe SD memory card 101 Setting for rear view camera 101 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel touch panel calibration 102 Setting the illumination color 103 Checking the version information 103 Replicating the settings 103 Turning off the screen 104 Using the radio FM Reading the screen 105 Using the touch panel keys 105 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 106 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 106 Using the Function menu 106 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 106 uning in strong signals 107 Using the radio AM Reading the screen 108 Using the touch panel keys 108 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 108 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 109 Using the Function menu 109 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 109 uning in strong signals 109 O HD Radio Reception Reading the screen 110 Using the touch panel keys 110 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 111 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 111 Switching the display 111 Using the Function menu 111 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 112 Switching the seek mode 112 uning in strong signals 112 Switching the reception mode 112 D Playing audio CDs Re
191. ge 165 2 Touch Loudness to select the level you want Each time you touch Loudness the level is selected in the following order Off Low Mid High Using subwoofer output The navigation system is equipped with a sub woofer output mechanism which can be turned on or off O Only when Sub Woofer is On you can adjust Phase Level and Frequency Hz 1 Touch Sub Woofer on the AV Sound Settings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch On to turn subwoofer output on To turn subwoofer output off touch Off gt Sub Woofer DVD V Sub Woofer Off Phase Reverse Level Frequency Hz S 3 Touch Reverse or Normal to select the phase of subwoofer output 4 Touch or next to Level to adjust the output level 6 to 24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased 168 En E Customizing preferences 5 Touch lt or gt next to Frequency Hz to select cut off fre quency Each time you touch lt 4 or gt cut off fre quencies are selected in the following order 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se lected range are output from the subwoofer Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers activate HPF high pa
192. gistration step has failed for Retry the registration and if the registration E some reason still fails try registering using your cellular phone Q T gt x lt en 187 Appendix MD Appendx SSC C 73 gt PTTSTS Messages for audio functions When problems occur with AV source playback an error message appears on the display Refer to the table below to identity the problem then take the suggested corrective action If the error persists record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center The messages in will appear on the Rear display Built in DVD drive Cause Dirty Scratched disc The disc is loaded upside down Message Reading error ERROR 02 XX Playback error Please remove Electrical or mechanical the disc Region code cannot be The disc does not have the same re Action Reference Clean the disc Replace the disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly e Replace the disc e Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On again matched DIFFERENT REGION gion number as the navigation sys DISC tem Unreadable disc This type of disc cannot be played by the navigation system Playback error due to irregu lar temperature Please re move the disc THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION ERROR FF FF The temperature of the navigation system is out of the normal operat ing range Undefined error Tracks that cannot be pla
193. gle for safety e Do not place a glass or a can on this naviga tion system when the LCD panel is open Doing so may break this navigation system Inserting a disc 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The Monitor Setup screen appears il Monitor Setup DNactinatian Dhana S Open SD Insert 2 Touch Open The LCD panel opens and the disc loading slot appears 3 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot O Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot 4 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The LCD panel closes Ejecting a disc 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The Monitor Setup screen appears 2 Touch Disc Eject The LCD panel opens and the disc is ejected 3 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The LCD panel closes Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card A CAUTION e To prevent data loss and damage to the sto rage device never remove it from this naviga tion system while data is being transferred e f data loss or corruption occurs on the sto rage device for any reason it is usually not possible to recover the data Pioneer accepts no liability for damages costs or expenses arising trom data loss or corruption e Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button when the SD memory card is not fully inserted Doing so may damage the card e Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button before the SD memory card has been completely re moved Doing so may damage the card Press the midd
194. guidance 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 2 Touch Demo Mode Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On Repeat demo drive e Off default Demo Mode is set off 3 Display the map screen The demonstration guidance will begin Registering your home Registering your home position saves time and effort Also routes to home positions can be calculated easily with a single touch of the key from the Destination Menu The regis tered home position can also be modified later 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 98 En ED Customizing preferences 2 Touch Set Home The Set Home screen appears il Set Home 3 Touch Home The Select Search method screen appears Touch Phone When you have already registered your home you can edit your home number 4 Search for a location After searching for a point display it on a map then touch OK The location is registered and then the Set Home screen appears gt For details refer to Chapter 8 5 Touch OK The registration is completed Correcting the current location Touch the screen to adjust the current position and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 2 Touch Modify Current Location 3 Scroll to the position where you want to set then touch OK Options on the System Settings menu Displaying the System
195. he channel that you want to store in memory 2 Touch Preset to display the preset list 3 Keep touching a preset tuning key P1 to P6 The selected station has been stored in mem Ory The next time you touch the same preset tun ing key P1 to P6 the station is recalled from memory 1 Up to 18 stations six for each of three XM bands can be stored in memory You can also touch lt 4 or gt to recall sta tions assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in the detailed information display dur ing the ALL CH MODE Selecting a channel from the list The list content can be switched so you can search for the song you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title O The channel list shows all channels during ALL CH MODE and the channels included in the selected category during CATEGORY MODE Io switch the channel mode touch Mode 1 Touch List XM channel list appears in the display Each touch of List changes the screen as fol lows Detail information display or Preset list display CH Name List Channel name Song Title List Song title Artist Name List Artist name 150 En 2 Touch the desired channel that you want to listen to XM 1 CATEGORY MODE 027 Cinemagic 028 On Broadway 029 U POP 020 Top 20 on 20 175 Ma S boo List Mode 022 MIX Basic Screen Touch or YJ to switch to the next page
196. icates the stock price movement If there is no stock price movements than previous close is displayed Viewing the detailed stock quotes 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Stocks 3 Touch the desired stock quote Detailed stock quote information is displayed Detailed Information SINX Price 1318 00 Change 0 07 Quote time Market Closed Day s high 5 78 Day s low 2 69 Volume 0 0k S Touch Delete The message confirming whether to delete the entry appears And then touch OK to delete the stock symbol from the Stock Info screen Chapter If your devices feature Bluetooth technology this navigation system can be connected to your devices wirelessly This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection For more information about the connectivity with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology refer to the information on our website Preparing communication devices This navigation system has a built in function to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology gt For details refer to Notes for hands free phoning on page 92 You can register and use devices that feature the following profiles with this navigation sys tem e HFP Hands Free Profile e A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Pro file O When the navigation system is turned off the Bluetooth connection is also discon n
197. igation system s memory O If you do not want to clear the memory that you have selected touch No Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology software Update files will be available for download in the future You will be able to download the lat est update from an appropriate website to vour PC O Before you download the files and install the update read through the instructions on the website Follow the instructions on the website for steps until Firmware up date becomes active En buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Using hands free phoninc 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 3 Touch Firmware update The current version is displayed l Bluetooth Firmware Update Version Firmware update 4 Touch Firmware update Update starts Notes for hands free phoning General notes e Connection to all cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar anteed e The line of sight distance between this na vigation system and your cellular phone must be 10 meters or less when sending and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth technology However the actual transmis sion distance may be shorter than the esti mated distance depending on the usage environment e With some cellular phones the ring soun
198. in multiple tracks For example dialog in up to eight lan guages can be recorded on a single DVD Vi deo letting you choose the language as desired Multi session Multi session is a recording method that al lows additional data to be recorded later When recording data on a CD ROM CD R or CD RW etc all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session Multi ses sion is a method of recording more than two Sessions In one disc Multi subtitle For example subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a single DVD Video letting you choose as desired Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing individual files to a CD R etc whenever re quired just as is done with files on floppy or hard disks Parental lock Some DVD Video discs with violent or adult or iented scenes feature parental lock which pre vents children from viewing such scenes With this kind of disc if you set the unit s parental lock level playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled or these scenes will be skipped Phone book An address book on user s phone is collec tively referred to as Phone book Depending on the cellular phone the Phone book may be called aname such as Contacts Busi ness card or something else Point of Interest POI Point Of Interest any of a range of locations stored in the data such as railway stations shops restaurants and amu
199. ing in a USB sto rage device on page 33 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Touch USB or SD on the AV Source menu to display the USB or SD screen O Playback is performed in order of folder numbers Folders are skipped if they con tain no playable files If there are no play able files in folder 01 root folder playback starts from folder 02 m Reading the screen x oO Media Repeat aa Pioneer Time 01 A BU OO A EELO O This unit may not achieve optimum perfor mance with some external storage devices O You can playback the files on a USB sto rage device compliant with Mass Storage Class For details about the USB Class 134 En refer to the manual supplied with the USB storage device Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Folder number indicator 3 Current folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing 4 File number indicator Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi cates the current playback condition E Scan play Rey Random play EJ Repeat play Indicator Meaning All audio files in the current external storage device USB SD are played repeat edly This is the default con Media Repeat dition All audio files in the current poder ncheat folder are played repeatedly Track Repeat The current file is played re
200. ing the direct traffic announcement function on the next page Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two methods for selecting and listing the chan nel ALL CH MODE You can select a channel from all channels when you operate this function CATEGORY MODE 154 En 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner You can select a channel within a selected category that you operate this function Select a SIRIUS channel directly gt For details refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly on this page Switch the SIRIUS display Each touch of Disp changes the display information Channel number Channel name Channel category Artist name feature Song program title Composer i Switch the channel category Touch lt 4 or gt to select the desired cate gory Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number 1 Touch Direct 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired channel number To cancel the input numbers touch Ed 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter The SIRIUS channel that was entered se lected 4 Touch K You return to the previous display Display the Radio ID If you select CH 000 the Radio ID is dis played 1 Touch Direct 2 Input 000 and then touch Enter If you select another channel display of the Radio ID is canceled Chapter Using the SIRIUS t
201. ing the received call history 85 Making a phone call using the dialed number history 86 Making a phone call using missed call history 86 Dialing GOOG 411 87 Dialing the entry in the Favorites 87 Dialing a facility s phone number 87 Dialing from the map 87 Receiving a phone call 88 Answering an incoming call 88 Rejecting an incoming call 88 Transferring the phone book 89 Changing the phone settings 89 Editing the devicename 90 Editing the password 90 Stopping Bluetooth wave transmission 90 Echo canceling and noise reduction 90 Answering acall automatically 90 Setting the automatic rejection function 91 Clearing memory 91 Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology software 91 Notes for hands free phoning 92 Customizing preferences The options in the Navi Settings menu 94 Displaying the Navi Settings screen 94 Checking the connections of leads 94 Checking sensor learning status and driving status 94 Using the Gas Mileage function 96 Recording your travel history 97 Using the demonstration guidance 98 Registering yourhome 98 Correcting the current location 98 Options on the System Settings menu 98 Displaying the System Settings screen 98 Customizing the regional settings 99 Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone 100 Changing the splash screen 101 Changin
202. io FM 2 The next time you touch the same pre set tuning key P1 to P6 the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory O You can also use lt 4 and gt to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 Using the Function menu 1 Touch FM on the AV Source menu to display the FM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch EJ FM 1 FM Function Storing the strongest broadcast fre quencies gt For details refer to this page 2 Tuning in strong signals gt For details refer to the next page Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you auto matically store the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 and once stored there you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key 1 Touch BSM Chapter Using the radio FM 14 2 Touch Start to start BSM BSM begins to flash While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength When this is complete BSM stops flashing To cancel the storage process touch Stop I Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved by using P1 to P6 IN4 Olpes y Buisn Tunin
203. io file 1 Insert the disc you want to play into disc loading slot Playback starts from the first file of the ROM 2 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the ROM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 3 Use this ROM screen to play the disc gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on the next page Reading the screen D 0900 DO o m 01 D01 Som Current ROOT Now Playing 9 Sis gt Disc Repeat Media Oka Go straight mp3 44 P il Dir Ac E 2 Navigation Shuffle All List Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing 3 Folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing 4 File indicator Shows the file number currently playing Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi cates the current playback condition E Scan play Rey Random play E Repeat play Indicator Meaning All audio files in the disc are played repeatedly This is the default condition Disc Repeat All audio files in the current Folder Repeat folder are played repeatedly The current file is played re Track Repeat peated All audio files in the current disc are played in random order Disc Random All audio files in the current folder are played in random order Folder Random
204. ion conditions 55 Canceling the route guidance 56 D Searching for and selecting a location Searching for a location by address 57 Searching for a city name first 57 Finding the location by specifying the house number 58 Searching fora name by entering multiple keywords 59 Setting up a route to yourhome 59 Searching for Points of Interest POI 60 Searching for POIs by specifying a category first 60 Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 60 Searching for a nearby PO 60 Searching for POls around the destination 61 Searching for POIs around the city 61 Selecting destination from Favorites 61 Searching for POls by using the data on the SD memory card 62 Selecting a location you searched for recently 62 Searching for a location by coordinates 62 D Registering and editing locations Registering a location into Favorites 64 Registering a location by Favorites 64 Registering a location by scroll mode 64 Editing registered locations 64 Editing the entry in Favorites 64 Editing yourhome 65 Sorting the entry in Favorites 65 Deleting the entry in Favorites 65 Exporting and importing the entry in Favorites 66 en 3 Exporting the entry in Favorites 66 Importing the Favorites items edited on AVIC FEEDS 66 Deleting an entry in History 67 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct Activating the
205. ions into the executable and 2 will oper uoIipnpo u Chapter KD Introduction ate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with xw c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d x If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place SS e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a Copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compil er kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normal ly accompany the operating system Such a con
206. is set to Liter Enter how much fuel you need to tra vel 60 miles 100 kilometers e Gas Price Per Unit Enter the fuel unit price 96 En ED Customizing preferences e Gas Unit Set the fuel unit e Currency Set the unit of currency When all the items are entered inputting the fuel consumption information is complete Entering the fueling information When you enter the fueling information to the navigation system and export the data to SD memory cards you can check the fuel con sumption information by using the utility pro gram AVIC FEEDS which is available separately on your PC O Up to 24 sets of Gas Price Calculation en tries can be stored You can also export the data as described below If the entries reach the maximum number a new entry will overwrite the oldest one Gas Mileage Management function only as sists you to calculate your average mileage based on the information you input The func tion does not receive data directly from the ve hicle 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 2 Touch Gas Mileage The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears il Gas Mileage Setting Surface Road Gas Mileage Freeway Gas Mileage Gas Price Per Unit Gas Price Calculation Gas Unit Currency 3 Touch Gas Price Calculation The Gas Price Calculation screen appears Chapter Customizing preferences 13 i Gas Price Calculation Distance Gas Pumped Ga
207. ition key back to Acc it off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on Problems in the AV screen 2 Symptom Cause Action Reference p CD or DVD playback is not pos The disc is inserted upside down Insert the disc with the label upward 2 ee The disc is dirty Clean the disc wy The disc is cracked or otherwise da Insert a normal round disc maged The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format file format The disc format cannot be played Replace the disc back The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is Page 196 cannot play The screen is covered by a cau The parking brake lead is not con Connect the parking brake lead correctly and tion message and the video can nected or applied apply the parking brake not be shown The parking brake interlock is acti Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply vated the parking brake No video output from connected AV1 Input or AV2 Input setting Correct the settings Page 162 equipment is incorrect No video output from connected The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA IPod cable for iPod is incorrect cable side If only one of these connection has been made the iPod will not work prop erly Page 33 The audio or video skips The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly secured Appendix MD Appendx SSC C
208. k T With some discs images may be unclear during slow motion playback ble En Reversed slow motion playback is not possi 2SIP HA GAG L BulAkejd 125 Chapter Ft Playing a DVD VR disc Using the Function menu DVD setup adjustments gt For details refer to Displaying DVD 1 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu DivX Setup menu on page 130 to display the DVD VR screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys 3 Touch Fe Function menu ov A Function Repeat L R Select DVD DIVX Setup 4 Repeating play Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e Title Repeats just the current title e Chapter Repeats just the current chapter e Disc Plays throughout the current disc O Ifyou perform chapter title search fast forward fast reverse or slow motion playback the repeat play range changes to Disc O This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped 2 Selecting audio output When playing DVDs that both channels are recorded in monaural you can switch the audio output Touch L R Select repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display e L R Left and right e L Lett e R Right e Mix Mixing left and right O This function is not available when disc playback has
209. k O Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect For details refer to the disc s in structions m Setting the parental lock Some DVD Video discs let you use parental lock to set restrictions so that children cannot watch violent or adult oriented scenes You can set the parental lock level in steps as de sired O When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock code number input indications may be dis played In this case playback will begin when the correct code number is input Setting the code number and level When you first use this function register your code number If you do not register a code number parental lock will not operate 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on the previous page 2 Touch Parental Level 3 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number 4 While the input number is displayed touch Enter The code number is registered and you can now set the level 5 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the de sired level The parental lock level is set Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is possible initial setting Level 7 to Level 2 Playback of discs for children and non adult oriented discs is possible Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil dren is possible If you want to change the parental level al ready set enter the registered code number and
210. k of SD 3C LLC m WMA WMV xipusddy r My Wis Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries DivX Appendix MD Appendx SSOC C SSCCC C W DivX is a compressed digital video format cre ated by the DivX video codec trom DivX Inc This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD R RW ROM and DVD R RW ROM discs Keeping the same terminology as DVD video individual DivX video files are called Titles When naming Tiles titles on a CD R RW or a DVD R RW disc prior to burning keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti cal order For U S A DivX is a registered trademark of DivX Inc and is used under license For Canada DivX is a registered trademark of DivX Inc and is used under license ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivX Inc This is an of ficial DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more informa tion and software tools to convert your files into DivX video ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video on Demand VOD content To generate the registration code lo cate the DivX VOD section in Displaying your DivX VOD registration code Go to vod divx com with this code to complete the registration pro cess and learn more
211. key 6 key 2 External unit indicator O Operation varies depending on the exter Displays the information that is sent by con nal unit connected In some cases nected external units some functions may not be used until 3 Auto Manual mode indicator you touch and hold the key Shows the current mode Use F1 F4 to operate the external unit Current time The external unit can be operated by trans mitting the operating commands set to F1 F4 Using the touch panel keys T The operating commands set to F1 F4 vary depending on the external unit Touch EXT1 or EXT2 on the AV Some functions may not be used until Source menu to select the external unit you touch and hold the key m gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Selecting the video for Rear display You can choose either to show the same image as the front screen or to show the se lected source on the Rear display Touch Rear Screen on the AV Source menu Each touch of Rear Screen changes the set tings as follows e Mirror AV The video on the front screen of the navigation unit is output to the Rear display e iPod The video and sound of the iPod are output to the Rear display e Disc The video and sound of the DVDs are output to the Rear display e AV1 The video and sound of AV1 are output to the Rear display e AV2 The vide
212. l Da 9S pue 10 Hurydieas Searching for Points of Interest POI Information about various facilities Points Of Interest POI such as gas stations parking lots or restaurants is available You can search for a POI by selecting the category or entering the POI Name To search for POls display the POI Search screen 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch POI The POI Search screen appears H POI Search 7 amp Y Gas Station ATM Coffee ite g y y Near Spell Name Near Me Destination S Around City Searching for POIs by specifying a category first You can search for POIs with a single touch from the preset category 1 Display the POI Search screen 2 Touch the desired category The POI List screen appears 3 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 1 Display the POI Search screen 2 Touch Spell Name The POI Name screen appears 60 En KD Searching for and selecting a location State code key 3 Touch the state code key and touch the desired state province or territory on the list If the location that you want to search for is in another state province or territory this changes the area setting ouch Country to display the country list If the destination is in another country this changes the country setti
213. l road O d e fthere is a loop or similar road configura gt P tion e f there is another road very nearby such as in the case of an elevated freeway e f you take a ferry e lf you take a recently opened road that is If you are driving on along straight road or not on the map a gently curving road 192 En Appendix Appendix OGG If you are on a steep mountain road with many height changes If you enter or exit a multi storey parking lot or similar structure using a spiral ramp If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si milar structure If your vehicle s wheels spin such as on a gravel road or in snow If you put on chains or change your tires for ones with a different size If trees or other obstacles block the GPS signals for a considerable period If you drive very slowly or in a start and stop manner as in a traffic congestion If you join the road after driving around a large parking lot x pu ddy When you drive around a traffic circle A iO When starting driving immediately after starting the engine Route setting information Route search specifications Your navigation system sets a route to your destination by applying certain built in rules to the map data This section provides some use ful information about how a route is set en 193 Appendix MD Appendx SSSC 7 7 3 PETSC lt CS S A
214. lay on page 45 4 To finish the setting touch OK s6ul aS u sS dew au Hulziwoj snyD Chapter KD Setting a route to your destination A CAUTION For safety reasons these route setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions you must stop ina sate place and put on the parking brake before setting your route O Some information regarding traffic regula tions depends on the time when the route calculation is performed Thus the infor mation may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes through the location in question Also the information on the traffic regula tions provided will be for a passenger vehi cle and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving The basic flow of creating your route 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake 2 Display the Top Menu screen 3 Select the method of searching for your destination gt For details refer to Chapter 8 4 Enter the information about your desti nation to calculate route 5 Confirm the location on the map gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on this page 6 The navigation system calculates the route to your destination and then shows the route on the map 7 Check and decide the route gt For details refer to Checking the calculated route on
215. le file can be used for each DivX file Multiple subtitle files cannot be associated Subtitle files that are named with the same character string as the DivX file before the extension are associated with the DivX file The character strings before the extension must be exactly the same However if there is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in a single folder the files are associated even if the file names are not the same The subtitle file must be stored in the same folder as the DivX Tile 198 En Up to 255 subtitle files may be used Any more subtitle files will not be recognized Up to 64 characters can be used for the name of the subtitle file including the ex tension If more than 64 characters are used for the file name the subtitle file may not be recognized The character code for the subtitle file should comply with ISO 8859 1 Using char acters other than ISO 8859 1 may cause the characters to be displayed incorrectly The subtitles may not be displayed correctly if the displayed characters in the subtitle file include control code For materials that use a high transfer rate the subtitles and video may not be comple tely synchronized If multiple subtitles are programed to dis play within a very short time frame such as 0 1 seconds the subtitles may not be dis played at the correct time Appendix Appendix c Media compatibility chart General DVD R RW R USB storage de DL vice
216. le of the SD memory card gently and pull out straight This system is not compatible with Multi Media Card MMC Compatibility with all SD memory cards is not guaranteed O This unit may not achieve optimum perfor mance with some SD memory cards Inserting an SD memory card 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The Monitor Setup screen appears uol e1ado diseg Chapter KD Basic operation il Monitor Setup DNactinatian Dhana Open SD Insert 2 Touch SD Insert The LCD panel opens and the SD card slot ap pears 3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot Insert it with the label surface facing to the up side and press the card until it clicks and com pletely locks 4 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The LCD panel closes and then the navigation system restarts O Ifthe SD memory card only contains music files or video files the navigation system will not be restarted Ejecting an SD memory card 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The Monitor Setup screen appears 32 En i Monitor Setup Press Eject SD before ejecting SD card Otherwise SD card may be damaged Open Eject SD 2 Touch Eject SD The following message appears il Monitor Setup Flap will open after restart 3 Touch Yes The navigation system restarts and then the LCD panel opens 4 Press the SD memory card until it clicks 5 Pull out the SD memory card 6 Press the OPEN CLOSE butt
217. lect 5 minutes 03 seconds touch 5 min 0 3 and Enter in order e Jo select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 1 min 0 0 and Enter in order e Jo select 100 minutes 05 seconds touch 1 0 0 5 s and Enter in order O To cancel an input number touch Clear To cancel the input numbers touch and hold Clear En Direct number search You can use this function when you need to enter a numerical command during DVD play back 1 Touch 10Key 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number 3 While the input number is displayed touch Enter Operating the DVD menu You can operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item on the screen directly O This function can be used when the BE key is displayed on the lower right corner of the LCD screen O This function may not work properly with some DVD disc content In that case use touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu O If you touch the screen while BEAJ is dis played the touch panel keys will not be dis played 1 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys 2 Touch Top Menu or Menu to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu 3 Touch the desired menu item ouch a The touch panel keys to select the menu item are displayed Using DVD menu by touch panel keys If items on the DVD menu appear the touch panel keys may overlay them If so select an item using those touch panel keys Chapter
218. lgorithm which is proprietary Dis tribution of modified unRAR sources in separate form or as a part of other software is permitted provided that it is clearly stated in the documentation and source comments that the code may not be used to develop a RAR WinRAR compatible archiver GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim cop ies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordi nary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free
219. lity of signals from the GPS satellites on the map without a significant location is poor causing reduced positioning accu positioning error racy Check the GPS signal reception and the position of the GPS antenna if necessary Obstacles are blocking signals from The quality of signals from the GPS satellites the satellites iS poor causing reduced positioning accu racy Check the GPS signal reception and the position of the GPS antenna if necessary or continue driving until reception improves Keep the antenna clear xipueddy The position of satellites relative to The quality of signals from the GPS satellites your vehicle is inadequate iS poor causing reduced positioning accu racy Continue driving until reception im proves Signals from the GPS satellites have The quality of signals from the GPS satellites been modified to reduce accuracy is poor causing reduced positioning accu GPS satellites are operated by the racy Wait until reception improves US Department of Defense and the US government reserves the right to distort positioning data for military reasons This may lead to greater positioning errors Ifa vehicle phone or cellular phone The quality of signals from the GPS satellites is used near the GPS antenna GPS is poor causing reduced positioning accu reception may be lost temporarily racy When using a cellular phone keep the antenna of the cellular phone away from the GPS anten
220. lity program AVIC FEEDS which is available separately on your PC AVIC FEEDS will be available on our website Stor ing the customized POI properly and inserting the SD memory card enables the system to display the icons on the map screen O You can select up to 10 items from the de tailed category 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Map Settings screen 3 Touch Overlay POI The Overlay POI screen appears i Overlay POI POI Custom POI Display 4 Touch Display to turn it On O If you do not want to display the POI icon on the map touch Display to turn it Off Even if Display is turned Off the POI selection setting is retained 5 Touch Custom POI The list of POI categories appears i Custom POI j Pioneer Favorite Places Favorite shops Favorite restaurants Favorite Music Stores Favorite Parks 6 Touch the category you want to dis play 7 To finish the selection touch OK Switching the view mode Various types of screen displays can be se lected for navigation guidance 2D map screen Verdugo Rd W Avenue 40 Census Tract 3 10 00 0 2 mi za A F Eagle Rock Blvd sBhul as Ud919s dew y Huiz wozsny Chapter KD Customizing the map screen settings 3D map screen S Ditman Ave
221. location For details about the search methods refer to Chapter 8 5 When the map of the location you want to register is displayed touch OK The location is registered and then the Edit Favorite screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Fa vorites on this page 6 Touch OK The registration is completed Registering a location by scroll mode 1 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the map to the position that you want to regis ter 2 ey Heights Baldwin Park 64 En y locations 2 Touch J to display the Quick Access menu 3 Touch gy The location is registered and then the Edit Favorite screen appears gt For details refer to Editing the entry in Fa vorites on this page 4 Touch OK The registration is completed Editing registered locations Editing the entry in Favorites 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 3 Touch J next to the location that you want to edit The Edit Favorite screen appears Edit Favorite Name Phone Icon P Modify Location 4 Touch Name You can enter the desired name O Up to 17 characters can be input for the name ouch Phone You can edit the registered phone number To dial the number touch Call m Touch Icon You can change the symbol displayed on the map and Favorites Touch Modify L
222. ls of the operation refer to Chapter 11 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Phone The Phone Menu screen appears O00 Phone menu Oo E a CY A A Dial Pad Call Home Contacts OESS Transfer a GOO0G 411 Received Calls Dialed Calls Missed Calls S A Name of connected cellular phone 84 En ED Using hands free phoninc 2 Network name of the cellular phone company BB Strength of the Bluetooth connection between the navigation system and the de vice 4 W Reception status of the cellular phone M Battery status of the cellular phone Making a phone call You can make a phone call in many different ways Direct dialing 1 Display the Phone Menu screen 2 Touch Dial Pad The direct dial screen appears s Dial Input Phone 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 3 Touch the number keys to enter the phone number The phone number that was input is dis played And then OK is activated Touch E The input number is deleted a digit at a time from the end of the number Continuing to press this deletes all of the digits Touch Kl The screen returns to the previous screen 4 Touch OK to make a call O To cancel the call after the system starts dialing touch Bm 5 Touch to end the call Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Making a call home easily You can call home without taking the time to enter the
223. ly For details concerning operation refer to the SIRIUS tuner s operation manuals This sec tion provides information on SIRIUS opera tions with navigation system which differs from that described in the SIRIUS tuner s op eration manual O When you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner sold separately with this navigation system Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is required For details concerning operation refer to the owner s manual of Pioneer SIR IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect universal tuner Reading the screen ALL CH MODE ae a E SIRIUS 3 P C 1 saf ALL CH Instant Replay Memo lt Seek gt Traffic Mode Disp Band Direct Preset CATEGORY MODE 0 SIRIUS 3 P C 1 Hes saf CATEGORY MODE Instant iV 4 Category gt Replay nah Memo lt Seek gt ice Mode Disp Band Direct Preset Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 SIRIUS band indicator Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se lected 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected 4 SIRIUS channel number indicator Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the tuner is tuned to Current time 6 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all channels in ALL CH MODE and select a channel from the selected category in CATEGORY MODE gt For details refer to Switch the SIRIU
224. ly referred to as Pioneer MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT WARE WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX PRESSLY EXCLUDED SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN TIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU The Software is complex and may contain some nonconformities defects or errors Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft ware will meet your needs or expectations that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted or that all non conformities can or will be corrected Furthermore Pioneer does not make any representations or warran ties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy reliability or otherwise Chapter Introduction cH 3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CLAIM OR LOSS IN CURRED BY YOU INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM TATION COMPENSATORY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES LOST PROFITS LOST SALES OR BUSINESS EXPENDITURES IN VESTMENTS OR COMMITMENTS IN CON NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF PLONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF KNEW OF OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE GATE INCLUDING WIT
225. ly tuned in Detail information Shows the detailed information of the broad cast channel currently being received Chapter Using the touch panel keys Touch XM on the AV Source menu to display the XM screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 ALL CH MODE CH 028 Se 2 26 XM 1 P c l ALL CH MODE Memo lt Seek gt aa 4 Traffic D Says Thanks Jerry Herman O CATEGORY MODE XM 1 P c l CATEGORY MODE Memo lt Seek tes 4 ee 5 Preset Traffic Jerry Herman Direct D Says Thanks Mode List OD 00 M Memorize the current song gt For details refer to Wemorizing the song on the next page 2 Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 151 3 Recalling channels from the preset Touch to recall the preset channel 4 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one ata time O Ifyou keep touching lt 4 or gt you can skip the broadcasting channels Select an XM band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed XM 1 XM 2 or XM 3 This is useful for switching the preset item Preset key for receiving the traffic audio service gt For details refer to Using the direct traffic announcement function on page 151 D Switching the XM channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two
226. m a specified time You can search for a desired scene by specify ing the time O Time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch Search Time Search gt Six z puua Chapter Playing a DivX video 21 2 Touch the keys to input the target num 3 Touch EJ ber or time and then touch Enter For time time search Function menu e lo select 5 minutes 03 seconds touch 5 Q Ean min 0 3 and Enter in order ae PE e o select 71 minutes 00 seconds touch 7 i Setup 1 min 0 0 and Enter in order e Jo select 100 minutes 05 seconds touch 1 0 0 5 s and Enter in order O To cancel an input number touch Clear To cancel the input numbers touch and hold Clear Repeating play Playing by selecting from the Each touch of Repeat changes the setting title list as follows e File Repeat just the current file You can select and play the title you want from e Folder Repeat just the current folder the list e Disc Plays throughout the current disc 1 Touch List on the playback screen The contents of the folder in which the cur rently playing file is located are displayed O If you select another folder during repeat play the repeat play range changes to Disc 2 Touch the title to play from the list O If you perform fast reverse or fast for ward during File the repeat play range changes to Folder O
227. map City Map You can select whether to display the city map when in certain metropolitan city areas O The city map is displayed when the map scale is 0 05 mile 50 meters or less Touch City Map Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Automatically switches to the city map when in a city map area e Off Does not show the city map O Even if you switch City Map to On city map cannot display in areas where there is no city map data Setting the switching of the city map display Sets whether to switch to the city map display when the vehicle is within a city map area Touch City Map Barrier Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Displays a city map when the vehicle enters the area of the city map e Off Chapter Customizing the map screen settings 05 Displays a city map when the area dis played on the map falls entirely within the city map area Show Traffic Incident Selects whether to display or hide the traffic notification icons on the map when incidents occur on your route Touch Show Traffic Incident Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e View default Displays the icons on the map e Hide Hides the icons on the map gt For details refer to Checking traffic informa tion manually on page 74 Bluetooth Connected Selects whether to display or hide the icon for current status of the pho
228. maximum number of the characters that you can display varies ac cording to the width of each character and of the display area Folder selection sequence or other opera tions may be altered depending on the en coding or writing software Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs 202 En Example of a hierarchy The following figure is an example of the tier structure in the disc The numbers in the fig ure indicate the order in which folder numbers are assigned and the order to be played back 7 Folder J File Level 3 Level 4 Level 2 Level 1 Notes e This product assigns folder numbers The user cannot assign folder numbers e f there is a folder that does not contain any playable file the folder itself will display in the folder list but you cannot check any Tiles in the folder A blank list will appear Also these folders will be skipped without display ing the folder number m Bluetooth J Bluetooth Appendix Appendix OS Bluetooth is a short range wireless radio con nectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for cellular phones hand held PCs and other devices Bluetooth oper ates in 2 4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per second Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group SIG comprising Ericsson Inc
229. may be Learning Status different from the actual speed of your vehi a cle so please do not use this instead of the speedometer 2 Touch Yes 2 Acceleration or deceleration Rotational Clears the results stored in Distance or speed Speed Pulse Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your vehicle is indicated Also rotational speed 3 Touch Learning Status when your vehicle turns to left or right is The following message appears shown 3D Calibration Status 3 Distance Speed Omph Distance Driving distance is indicated 4 Speed Pulse ou Are you sure you want to reset Total number of speed pulses is indicated 5 Learning Status Distance All No Current driving mode is indicated Tearing Status sensor Initializing 6 Inclination S Degree of slope of the street that you are currently running is indicated 4 Touch All D Degree of learning Clears all learning statuses Sensor learning situations for distance O Touch All for the following cases Distance right turn Right Turn left turn After changing the installation position Left Turn and 3D detection 3D are indi of the navigation system cated by the length of bars After changing the installation angle of 1 When tires have been changed or the navigation system chains fitted turning on the Speed After moving the navigation system to Pulse allows the system to detect the another vehicle fact that the tire diameter has changed Touch
230. mory card on page 31 2 Display the Destination Menu screen 3 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 4 Touch Ey Data export starts 66 En y locations After exporting the data is finished the follow ing message appears Favorites E Home Favorites file export complete OK 3 MY OFFICE a gt gt E Delete Add 5 Touch OK The Favorites screen appears Importing the Favorites items edited on AVIC FEEDS You can import the locations that you have edi ted on the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is available separately to Favorites O When a location that is already registered in Favorites is imported the location is overwritten 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Destination Menu screen 3 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 4 Touch BA The following message appears Favorites Home Would you like to replace the existing favorites Yes IS MY OFFICE gt E gt gt E Delete Add y locations 5 Touch Yes Data import starts After importing the data is finished the Fa vorites screen appears m Deleting an entry in History Items in History can be deleted All entries in History can be deleted at once 1 Display the D
231. mpares GPS data with your estimated position as calculated from the data of built in sensor However if only the data from the built in sensor is available for a long period positioning errors are gradually com pounded until the estimated position becomes unreliable For this reason whenever GPS sig nals are available they are matched with the data of the built in sensor and used to correct it for improved accuracy O If you use chains on your wheels for winter driving or put on the spare wheel errors may suddenly increase because of differ ence in wheel diameter Initialize the sensor status and it may recover the accuracy to normal condition gt For details refer to Clearing status on page 9b Appendix Map matching As mentioned the positioning systems used by this navigation system are susceptible to certain errors Their calculations may on occa sion place you in a location on the map where no road exists In this situation the processing system understands that vehicles travel only on roads and can correct your position by ad justing it to a nearby road This is called map matching J amp With map matching Without map matching Handling large errors Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by combining GPS Dead Reckoning and map matching However in some situations these functions may not work properly and the error may become bigger Appendix When positioning by GPS i
232. n The Service Information Screen screen ap pears 3 Check the version information Replicating the settings You can import settings you have made on the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is avail able separately to the navigation system Chapter ED Customizing preferences 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 3 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 4 Touch Setting Replicator A message confirming whether to update the settings appears 5 Touch Yes Update starts After the settings are updated a message con firming whether to restart the navigation sys tem appears 6 Touch OK The navigation system restarts Turning off the screen By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen you can turn off the screen display without turning off the voice guidance 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Screen Off The screen is turned off O Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it back on 104 En Chapter Using the radio FM 14 You can listen to the radio by using the naviga Using the touch panel keys tion system This section describes operations for radio FM 5 Touch FM on the AV Source menu to ln 1234 5 display the FM screen mP a
233. n in order to view the video image in the wide screen Each touch of Widescreen changes the setting as follows Chapter Using an iPod iPod 25 e On Outputs the wide screen video from iPod e Off Outputs the normal sized video from iPod O Display size is changed after you change Widescreen setting and select the video to play O This setting is available only during the video operation Setting iPod control mode While the control mode is set to iPod you Can operate iPod function from the con nected iPod Each touch of Change Control Mode changes the setting as follows e Navi This navigation system s iPod function can be operated from this navi gation system e iPod This navigation system s iPod function can be operated from the con nected iPod 6 Playing songs related to the currently playing song Songs related to the currently playing song are played You can play songs of the follow ing lists e Artist list of currently playing genre e Album list of currently playing artist e Song list of currently playing album This setting is available only during the music operation I Depending on the number of files in the iPod there may be a delay when display ing a list e Link Artists Songs related to the cur rently playing artist will be played e Link Albums Songs related to the currently playing aloum will be played e Link Genre Songs related t
234. n on the map touch Display to turn it Off Even if Display is turned Off the POI selection setting is retained 4 Touch POI The Overlay POI Main Category screen appears il Overlay POI Main Category y Automotive Facility M Business M Community Finance Food Shop VY E Health amp medical 5 Touch the category you want to dis play A list of subcategories under the selected main category appears i Shop j g Antique Art B Beauty Be Books Magazines E Detail Camera Clocks Wristwatch CD Video Shop Computer Consumer Electronics i Detail OK ouch OK The previous screen returns 6 Touch the subcategory A red check mark appears next to the selected category Io cancel the selection touch the entry again Chapter Customizing the map screen settings CH f you want to search with more detailed cate gories touch Detail Touch the item and touch OK When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected blue check marks will appear i Shop 7 E Antique Art E Beauty W Books Magazines Detail Camera Clocks Wristwatch E CD Video Shop Computer Consumer Electronics E Detail OK 1 When subcategory is selected Detail is not available 7 Touch OK The previous screen returns 8 To finish the selection touch OK Displaying the customized POIs Creating a customized POI is possible by using the uti
235. n adjust volume when you are talking Touch B to reject an incoming call f you touch Close Menu the menu is closed and QB appears To display the menu again touch EES 3 Touch to end the call The call ends O Ifthe voice on the other end of the call is too quiet to hear you can adjust the volume of the received voice gt For more details about Volume refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 100 Ol You may hear a noise when you hang up the phone Rejecting an incoming call You can reject an incoming call gt For details refer to Setting the automatic re jection function on page 91 When a call comes in touch fi The call is rejected O The rejected call is recorded in the missed call history list gt For details refer to Making a phone call using missed call history on page 86 Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Transferring the phone book You can transfer the phone book entries from your cellular phone to the phone book of navi gation system O Depending on the cellular phone Phone Book may be called a name such as Con tacts Business card or something else O With some cellular phones it may not be possible to transfer the entire phone book at once In this case transfer addresses one at a time from your phone book using your cellular phone O A maximum of 1 000 entries can be trans ferred per cellular phone If the entrie
236. n rear view camera image installed on your vehicle When the shift lever is in the REVERSE R po sition the screen automatically switches to full screen rear view camera Camera for Rear view mode Rear View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer etc as a split screen where map information is partially displayed Please be aware that with this set ting camera image is not resized to fit and that a portion of what is seen by the camera is not viewable A CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images otherwise the screen image may appear reversed O Immediately verify whether the display changes to a rear view camera image when the shift lever is moved to REVERSE R from another position O When the screen changes to full screen rear view camera image during normal driving switch to the opposite setting in Polarity 1 Display the System Settings screen 2 Touch Back Camera The Back Camera Settings screen appears 3 Touch Camera to turn it On M You can only switch to Rear View if this setting is On 4 Touch Battery or GND next to Polarity to select the appropriate polarity setting e Battery When the polarity of the con nected lead is positive while the shift lever is in the REVERSE R position e GND When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the shift lever is in the REVERS
237. n the map e Off Hides the 3D Landmark on the map Displaying maneuvers Selects whether to display or hide the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map s6ul aS u s dew au Hulziwoj snyD Chapter KD Customizing the map screen settings Touch Show Manuever Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e View default Displays the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map e Hide Hides the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map MSN Direct Selects whether to display or hide the received MSN Direct information on the map O Following informations are displayed Gas Prices Movie Times Local Events O MSN Direct icons are not displayed when the map scale is 0 75 mile 1 kilometers or more Touch MSN Direct Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Displays the icons on the map e Off Hides the icons on the map J Displaying POI on the map Displays icons for the surrounding facilities POI on the map O POI icons are not displayed when the map scale is 0 75 mile 1 kilometers or more Displaying preinstalled POIs on the map O You can select up to 10 items from the de tailed category 1 Display the Map Settings screen 2 Touch Overlay POI The Overlay POI screen appears 46 En i Overlay POI POI Custom POI Display 3 Touch Display to turn it On O If you do not want to display the POI ico
238. n with high tem peratures Depending on the kind of the external sto rage device USB SD you use this naviga tion system may not recognize the storage device or files may not be played back prop erly The text information of some audio and video files may not be correctly displayed File extensions must be used properly There may be a slight delay when starting playback of files on an external storage de Appendix Appendix OGG vice USB SD with complex folder hierar chies Operations may vary depending on the kind of an external storage device USB ol It may not be possible to play some music files from SD or USB because of file char acteristics file format recorded applica tion playback environment storage conditions and so on USB storage device compatibility gt For more details about USB storage device compatibility with this navigation system refer to Specifications on page 214 Protocol bulk You cannot connect a USB storage device to this navigation system via a USB hub Partitioned USB memory is not compatible with this navigation system Firmly secure the USB storage device when driving Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the floor where it may become jammed under the brake or gas pedal There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data Some USB storage devices connected to this navigation system may generate noise on the ra
239. na Appendix MD Appendx SSC lt 73EPTSCS lt CS S Symptom Cause Action Reference You cannot position your vehicle Something covers the GPS antenna Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray on the map without a significant paint or vehicle wax because this may block positioning error the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals Signals from the vehicle s speed Check that the cables are properly connected pulse are not being picked up prop If necessary consult the dealer that installed erly the system The navigation system may not be Check that the navigation system is securely mounted securely in your vehicle mounted and if necessary consult the dealer that installed the system The navigation system is installed Contirm the installation angle The naviga with an extreme angle exceeding tion system must be installed within the al the installation angle limitations lowed installation angle For details refer to Installation Manual Indication of the position of your ve Check whether or not the reverse gear signal hicle is misaligned after a U turn or input lead violet is connected properly The reversing navigation system works properly without the lead connected but positioning accuracy will be adversely affected The map color does not switch Day Night Display is set to Day Check Day Night Display setting and automatically between daytime mak
240. ne connection via Bluetooth wireless technology Touch Bluetooth Connected Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e View default Displays the Bluetooth connection icon on the map e Hide Hides the Bluetooth connection icon on the map gt For details about the Bluetooth connection icon refer to Bluetooth connection icon on page 40 Setting the current street name display Selects whether to display or hide the street name or city name that your vehicle is travel ing along Touch Current Street Name Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e View default Displays the street name or city name on the map e Hide Hides the street name or city name on the map Setting the Favorites icon display You can select whether to display the Favor ites icon on the map O Favorites icons are displayed when the map scale is 10 mile 20 kilometers or less Touch Favorites Icon Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Displays the Favorites icon on the map e Off Hides the Favorites icon on the map 3D Land Mark You can select whether to display the 3D Land mark on the map O 3D Landmark only appears when the view mode is 3D View and the map scale is set to 0 25 mile 200 m or lower Touch 3D Land Mark Each time you touch the key changes that set ting e On default Displays the 3D Landmark o
241. ne latitude longitude and altitude for accurate positioning in three dimensions But if signal quality is poor only two dimen sions latitude and longitude can be obtained and positioning errors are somewhat greater Positioning by Dead Reckoning The built in sensor in the navigation system also calculates your position The current loca tion is measured by detecting driving distance with the speed pulse the turning direction with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the road with the G sensor The built in sensor can even calculate changes of altitude and corrects for discre pancies in the distance traveled caused by driving along winding roads or up slopes If you use this navigation system with connect ing the speed pulse the system will become more accurate than no connection of speed 190 En pulse So you connect the speed pulse without fail to get the accuracy of positioning O The position of the speed detection circuit vary depending on the vehicle model For details consult your authorized Pioneer dealer or an installation professional O Some types of vehicles may not output a speed signal while driving at just a few kilo meters per hour In such a case the current location of your vehicle may not be dis played correctly while in traffic congestion or in a parking lot How do GPS and Dead Reckoning work together For maximum accuracy your navigation sys tem continually co
242. nets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applica tions An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com m iPod compatibility This product supports only the following iPod models and iPod software versions Others may not work correctly e iPod nano first generation Ver 1 3 1 e iPod nano second generation Ver 1 1 3 e jPod nano third generation Ver 1 1 3 e jPod nano fourth generation Ver 1 0 3 e iPod fifth generation Ver 1 3 e iPod classic Ver 2 0 1 e jPod touch first generation Ver 2 2 1 e iPod touch second generation Ver 2 2 1 e iPhone Ver 2 2 1 e iPhone 3G Ver 2 2 1 uoIpnpo u En 27 O In this manual iPod and iPhone will be re ferred to as iPod 1 When you use this navigation system with a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod CD IU50V sold separately you can control an iPod compatible with this navigation sys tem O To obtain maximum performance we re commend that you use the latest software for the iPod O Operation methods may vary depending on the iPod models and the software version of iPod O For more details about iPod compatibility with this navigation system refer to the in formation on our website O iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc regis tered in the U S and other countries M iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc Map coverage
243. nformation and tries to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better routes Also when you are traveling along a route and the system finds another better route for avoiding the traffic congestion the current route will be recalculated automati cally The term traffic congestion in this section in dicates the following types of traffic condi tions Stop and go traffic Stopped traffic Closed blocked roads Viewing the traffic event Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in the form of a list This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred their lo cation and their distance from your current po sition Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates traffic information the information pro vided may not necessarily correspond to actual traffic conditions Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Traffic Events The Traffic Event List screen appears Chapter Browsing information on MSN Direct dH Traffic Event List Refresh 3 Select an incident you want to view in detail The details of the selected incident are dis played O Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident If the information cannot be dis played on one screen touch J or J to view the remaining information Touch Sort You
244. ng 4 Enter the POI name and then touch OK The POI List screen appears 5 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Touch Sort Each time you touch Sort changes the sort order O Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance from the vehicle position Sorts the items in the list alphabetically Searching for a nearby POI You can search for POIs in your Surroundings 1 Display the POI Search screen 2 Touch Near Me POIl s are divided into several categories Chapter Searching for and selecting a location CH 3 Touch the category you want The POI List screen appears O If there are more detailed categories within the selected category repeat this step as many times as necessary 4 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Searching for POIs around the destination Ol This function is available when the route is Set 1 Display the POI Search screen 2 Touch Near Destination PO s are divided into several categories 3 Touch the category you want The POI List screen appears O If there are more detailed categories within the selected category repeat this step as many times as necessary 4 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Searching for POIs around the city You can search for POls a
245. nlarge the album artwork If you touch again the artwork returns to its nor mal size 2 Category tabs Shows the list to narrow down the songs If you want to use the list of Audiobooks Composers or Songs touch MENU to display the lists 3 Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 144 4 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files After you touch the key the top category menu appears to let you se lect the item for playback O This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video file in your iPod O If iPod fifth generation is connected the following settings are automatically changed when the operation screen is switched to the screen to operate video files e Repeat is set to All e Shuffle is set to Off Display the top category menu Touching the key displays the top category be fore you use the category tabs If you select the song using the category tabs to play touching the key displays the previous list Skip back or forward to another song Touching bl skips to the start of the next song Touching ke once skips to the start of the current song Touching again will skip to the previous song When the track with chapters played chapter can be skipped back and forward Fast reverse or forwar
246. nsmission You can stop transmission of electric waves by turning off the Bluetooth function If you do not use the Bluetooth wireless technology we recommend selecting Off 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Bluetooth On Off Touching Bluetooth On Off switches be tween On and Off Echo canceling and noise reduction When you are operating hands free phoning in the vehicle you may hear an undesirable echo This function reduces the echo and noise while you are using hands free phoning and maintains a certain sound quality 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Echo Cancel Touching Echo Cancel switches between On and Off Answering a call automatically The navigation system automatically answers incoming calls to the cellular phone so you can answer a call while driving without taking your hands off the steering wheel 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Auto Answer Preference The Auto Answer Preference screen ap pears Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz i Auto Answer Preference off Immediately After 3 seconds After 6 seconds After 10 seconds 3 Touch the desired option e Off No automatic response Respond manually e Immediately Answers immediately e After 3 seconds Answers after three sec onds e After 6 seconds Answers after six sec onds e After 10 seconds Answer
247. nt frequency Frequency indicator 6 Current time D Detailed information gt For details refer to Switching the display on the next page Signal level indicator Blending mode indicator gt For details refer to Switching the recep tion mode on page 112 Signal type indicator Shows the type of signal currently being re ceived If a digital broadcasting is received D appears Otherwise A appears di Seek type indicator gt For details refer to Switching the seek mode on page 112 8 110 En Using the touch panel keys Tie eee ca Me 6 00 FM1 4 ICRT HD1 100 1 MHz 7B D 100 1 mhz FM1 4 ICRT HD1 1 4 Preset Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on the next page 2 Select a preset channel lt lt or gt can be used to switch presets chan nels 3 Perform manual tuning To tune manually touch lt 4 or gt briefly The frequencies move up or down one step at a time Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning touch and hold lt or gt for about one second and release The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad cast strong enough for good reception is found You can cancel seek tuning by touching either lt 4 or gt briefly J Ifyou touch and hold lt or gt you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tuning will start as Soon as you re lease the keys O You can also perform these operati
248. ntegration gt A gt Lightlove i ae Pioneer Lak i Ni AA OK 2 Touch the category you want 3 Touching 4 or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list 4 Touch the item that you want to refine Refine the item until the track title is displayed on the list 5 On the video list touch the video you want to play O After you select the video using this func tion touching MENU displays the list pre viously selected pod pod ue Bursn en 143 Chapter 25 Using an iPod iPod Searching for applicable items alphabetically Using the search control displays the page which includes the first applicable option O This function is available for the alphabeti cal list only 7 40 Music hare a tN Brilliance ae fT fe TY mS se no f gt g hes J gt AR gt See if Driveit i veer a See aes o Furtherintegration Lightlove 1 Pioneer Search control 1 Touch the category you want 2 Touch the item that you want to refine 3 Touch lt or gt to select the character 1 An article listed below and space at the be ginning of the artist name will be ignored and the next character will be taken into ac count for searching _ pA or a e AN An or an THE The or the 4 Touch the character key to display the page which includes applicable options 5 On the video list touch the video you
249. o and sound of AV2 are output to the Rear display O When Mirror AV is selected the following restrictions are applied to Rear display When selecting Rear View in the map display nothing is displayed All sounds cannot be output for Rear display When playing back video files on the ex ternal storage device USB SD the Video image is not output O When Disc is selected the following restric tions are applied to Rear display When a CD or MP38 WMA AAC disc is set in the built in DVD drive only the sound is output O When iPod is selected the following restric tions are applied to Rear display The Video image and sound are output only when the appropriate setting on AV1 Input is iPod 1 When AV is selected the following restric tions are applied to Rear display The Video image and sound are output only when AV1 AV2 has both video and sound 160 En ED Other functions The Video image and sound are output only when the appropriate setting on AV1 Input or AV2 Input are Video Operating the picture adjustment A CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo tion To enable these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Refer to Important Information for the user a separate manual You can adjust the picture
250. o the cur rently playing genre will be played m pod pod ue Bulsn Chapter 26 Using the Bluetooth audio player You can control the Bluetooth audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless technology O Before using the Bluetooth audio player you need to register and connect the device to this navigation system gt For more details of the operation refer to Chapter 11 O Depending on the Bluetooth audio player connected to this navigation system the available operations with this navigation system are limited to the following two le vels A2DP profile Advanced Audio Distribu tion Profile Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible AVRCP profile Audio Video Remote Control Profile Playing back pausing selecting songs etc are possible O Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market op erations with your Bluetooth audio player using this navigation system vary greatly in range Please refer to the instruction man ual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operat ing your player on this navigation system O While you are listening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player please refrain from operating your cellular phone as much as possible If you try operating on your cellu lar phone the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song play back O Even if you switch to another source while listenin
251. ocation You can change the registered location by scrol ling the map y locations Editing your home When you have already registered your home you can edit the information of your home 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears O Home location is displayed on the top of the list Favorites HOME E MY PARENTS E my SISTER EJ MY BROTHER BJ PusA GB MY OFFICE o gt gt E Delete Add 3 Touch J next to the home location The Edit Favorite screen appears Edit Favorite Phone E Modify Location Touch Phone You can edit the registered phone number To dial the number touch Call Touch Modify Location You can change the registered location by scrol ling the map 4 Touch OK The registration is completed Sorting the entry in Favorites 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen appears 3 Touch Sort Each time you touch Sort changes the sort order O Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen Sorts the items in the list in order by dis tance from the vehicle position Sorts the items in the list alphabetically Ea Sorts the items in the list in order of the re cently used items Deleting the entry in Favorites 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Favorites The
252. of search depends on the number of entered keywords Entering a keyword All names containing the word beginning with the entered keyword are displayed as a search result Entering two keywords The names including the following two words below are displayed as a result e The word that matches with the first key word you entered e The word beginning with the second key word Entering three keywords The names including the following two words below are displayed as a result e The words that match with both first and second keywords you entered e The word beginning with the third keyword e g Searching East West Street Entered key Search results words EAST W East West Street is searchable WEST S East West Street is searchable EAST WEST S East West Street is searchable i STREET East West Street is searchable WES East West Street is not search able E WEST East West Street is not search STREET able Setting up a route to your home If your home location is stored the route home can be calculated by touching a single key 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Return Home Location confirmation screen appears If the home location has not been stored yet a confirmation message appears Touch Register The Set Home screen appears gt For details refer to Registering your home on page 98 UO1 2I0 e Hu
253. older numbers Folders are skipped if they con tain no playable files If there are no play able files in folder 01 root folder playback starts from folder 02 Reading the screen 01 13 Music Lal i P i V i Search jA dt gt Il O This unit may not achieve optimum perfor mance with some external storage devices O You can playback the files on a USB sto rage device compliant with Mass Storage Class For details about the USB Class refer to the manual supplied with the USB storage device Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Folder number indicator 3 Current folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing 4 File number indicator File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track D Current time Using the touch panel keys Video i m 01 D03 uss Current ROOT Display the Function menu gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on page 139 2 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video files in the external storage device USB SD 3 Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time gt For details refer to Searching for a speci fic s
254. on The LCD panel closes and then the navigation system restarts Plugging and unplugging a USB storage device A CAUTION e To prevent data loss and damage to the sto rage device never remove it from this naviga tion system while data is being transferred e f data loss or corruption occurs on the sto rage device for any reason it is usually not possible to recover the data Pioneer accepts no liability for damages costs or expenses arising trom data loss or corruption Basic operation Plugging in a USB storage device Plug a USB storage device into the USB connector USB connector x O USB storage device Oo O mmni O Compatibility with all USB storage device is not guaranteed This navigation system may not achieve op timum performance with some USB sto rage devices O Connection via USB hub is not possible Unplugging a USB storage device Pull out the USB storage device after checking that no data is being accessed Connecting and disconnecting an iPod A CAUTION e To prevent data loss and damage to the sto rage device never remove it from this naviga tion system while data is being transferred e f data loss or corruption occurs on the sto rage device for any reason it is usually not possible to recover the data Pioneer accepts no liability for damages costs or expenses arising trom data loss or corruption Connecting your iPod Using the USB interfac
255. onds touch the list 1 0 0 5 s and Enter in order O To cancel an input number touch Clear To cancel the input numbers touch and hold Clear 1 Touch List on the playback screen The contents of the folder in which the cur rently playing Tile is located are displayed Touch and hold List The contents of the root folder are displayed 2 Touch the title to play from the list i m0i 303 AVI Me 7 53 usg Current ROOT 01 13 Music 01 Pioneer Time01 avi me Y i hee r 0 Sif 02 Pioneer Time02 avi Search if 4 ze 03 Pioneer Time03 avi i a aa gt Il 04 Pioneer Time04 avi 05 Pioneer Time05 avi ess 06 Pioneer Time06 avi O Touching or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list 138 En Chapter Playing video files from USB or SD 24 Using the Function menu 1 Touch USB or SD on the AV Source menu to display the USB or SD screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys 3 Touch EJ O If the touch panel keys are not shown touch anywhere on the screen to display them i Function Repeat Video Output Setting 1 Changes the repeat range Each touch of Repeat changes the setting as follows e Media Repeat all video files in the se lected external storage device USB SD e Fil
256. ons by using the TRK lt gt button 4 Select a band Touch Band repeatedly until the desired band is displayed FM1 FM2 FM3 or AM This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band Chapter HD Radio Reception 16 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference 6 00 100 1 MHz Mi P 4 born FM1 4 ICRT HD1 lt p cHe lt Seek gt Disp Band Detail Touch Preset or Detail Each touch of Preset or Detail changes the detailed information display or preset list display Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall also with the touch of a key Mi P 4 Me 6 00 FM1 4 ICRT HD1 100 1 MHz SPICH lt Seek gt Disp Band Detail Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory touch and hold a preset tuning key P1 to P6 until the pre set number e g P C 1 appears The selected radio station has been stored in memory 2 The next time you touch the same pre set tuning key P1 to P6 the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory O You can also use lt and gt to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 S
257. or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Founda tion If the Library does not specify a license version num ber you may choose any version ever published by the Free Chapter Introduction cH Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompati ble with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Founda tion write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANT
258. or pre VIOUS page O During CATEGORY MODE touch lt or gt to switch to another category Using My Mix function My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re ceived When the song that matches the mem orized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song O Atrack itself is NOT downloaded ONLY the song title and the artist name are memor ized Memorizing the song The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of current song you are listening to are memorized and a con firmation message appears O The song title and artist name of up to 12 songs can be memorized Trying to save more than 12 songs will result in older ones being overwritten O You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name when is dis played on the title information This function is invalid for the channel 000 The memorized title may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions Chapter O You can customize the setting for the mem Tuning in to the memorized channel Se ak concerning the opera Touch Traffic g p O You can also perform this operation by tion refer to Setting the memorized to
259. orage device USB SD Voice commands and operations Shuffle play Plays all songs randomly Pause Pauses the track or file currently playing Resume Resumes the track or file currently playing Next song Plays the next track or file Previous song Plays the previous track or file or returns to the beginning of the track or file currently playing 174 En Chapter Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Voice commands related to hands free phoning O You can make a phone call by voice dialing if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being paired with the navigation system O For lt entry s name gt shown on the follow ing chart say the name of the entry stored in Contacts O For lt phone number gt shown on the follow ing chart say the desired phone number Voice commands and operations Call lt entry s name gt Makes a call to the entry 2 Call lt entry s name gt general gt Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes Dials the general phone number of the entry 3 Call lt entry s name gt mobile gt Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes Dials the cellular phone number of the entry 3 Call lt entry s name gt home Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes gt Dials the home phone number of the entry 3 Call lt entry s name gt work Displays the mes
260. orporation cause of disc characteristics disc format 1 Itis not possible to play DVD Audio discs recorded application playback environ This DVD drive may not be able to play all ment storage conditions and so on discs bearing the marks shown above e Road shocks may interrupt disc playback e Read the precautions for discs before _ using them AVCHD recorded discs This unit is not compatible with discs recorded saa in AVCHD Advanced Video Codec High Defi Ambient conditions for playing nition format Do not insert AVCHD discs If a disc inserted the disc may not be ejected e At extremely high temperatures a tempera ture Cutout protects this product by switch ing it off automatically Appendix MD Appendx SSOC C SSCCC C W Playing DualDisc e DualDiscs are two sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other e Playback of the DVD side is possible with this navigation system However since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com patible with the general CD standard it may not be possible to play the CD side with this navigation system e Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches to the disc e Serious scratches can lead to playback pro blems on this navigation system In some cases a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject To prevent this we recommend you refrain from u
261. osphere Bit rate This expresses data volume per second or bps units bits per second The higher the rate the more information is available to reproduce the sound Using the same encoding method such as MP3 the higher the rate the better the sound Built in sensor The built in sensor that enables the system to estimate your vehicle s position CD DA This stands for a general music CD commer cial release audio CD In this manual this word is sometime used for a distinction be tween data CDs which include compressed audio files and general music CDs Chapter Titles of DVD Video or DVD VR are in turn di vided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book With discs featuring chapters you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search Current location The present location of your vehicle your cur rent location is shown on the map by a red tri angle mark Destination A location you choose as the end point of your journey Appendix Appendix OGG DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX Inc DivX media Tiles contain highly com pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus subtitles and alternate audio tracks Many DivX media files are available for down load online and you can create your own using your personal content and easy to use tools
262. p in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route O Some information regarding traffic regula tions depends on the time when the route calculation is performed Thus the infor mation may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes through the location in question Also the information on the traffic regula tions provided will be for a passenger vehi cle and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving To search for a location display the Destina tion Menu screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Destination The Destination Menu screen appears Destination Menu 7 e A Address Return Home AVIC FEEDS msn Direct e F Favorites History Cancel Route S Coordinates Route Overview Searching for a location by address The most frequently used function is Ad dress in which the address is specified and the destination is searched You can select the method of searching for a location by address e Searching for a city name first e Finding the location by specifying the house number To search for a location display the Address Search screen 1 Display the Destination Menu screen 2 Touch Address The Address Search screen appears l Address Search House City CALIFORNIA USA 3
263. p menu 130 Setting the top priority languages 130 Setting the angle icon display 130 Setting the aspect ratio 130 Setting the parental lock 131 C6 En Setting the code number and level 131 Setting Auto Play 131 Setting the subtitle file for DivX 132 Language code chart for DVDs 133 23 Playing music files from USB or SD Starting procedure 134 Reading the screen 134 Using the touch panel keys Music 135 Selecting a track from the list 135 Using the Function menu 136 24 Playing video files from USB or SD Starting procedure 137 Reading the screen 137 Using the touch panel keys Video 137 Playing by selecting from the title list 138 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 138 Using the Function menu 139 25 Using an iPod iPod Starting procedure 140 Reading the screen 140 Using the touch panel keys Music 141 Browsing fora song 141 Operating this navigation system s iPod function from your iPod 142 Starting the video playback 142 Using the touch panel keys Video 143 Browsing for a video 143 Using the Function menu 144 26 Using the Bluetooth audio player Reading the screen 146 Using the touch panel keys 147 Using the Function menu 147 27 Using the XM tuner Reading the screen 148 Using the touch panel keys 149 Selecting an XM channel directly 149 Displaying the Radio ID 149 Storing and recalling broadcast st
264. panies such as cancellation of services or changing to pay services Also we do not accept return of the pro duct for this reason m 24 En KD Introduction Additional Safety Information Parking brake interlock Certain functions such as viewing of DVD Video and certain touch key operations of fered by this navigation system could be dan gerous and or unlawful if used while driving To prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion there is an inter lock system that senses when the parking brake is set and when the vehicle is moving If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving they will become disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the park ing brake A WARNING e LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH IM PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN JURY OR DAMAGE e To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws the navi gation system is not for use with a Video image that is visible to the driver e In some countries or states the viewing of Video image on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal Where such reg
265. peatedly All audio files in the current external storage device USB SD are played in ran dom order Media Random All audio files in the current folder are played in random order Folder Random The beginning of the first Media Scan audio files of each folder is played for about 10 seconds The beginning of each track Folder Scan in the current folder is played for about 10 seconds gt For more information refer to Using the Function menu on page 136 6 File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing Q Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track Current time Chapter Playing music files from USB or SD CE 9 Current file number and total number of files Shows the file number currently played and the total number of playable audio files Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing when available O Ifthe title of a track is not available the file name appears d Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing when available 2 Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track when available O The information marked with an asterisk is displayed only when the information has been encoded on the compressed audio files If specific information has not been encoded on the files is displayed in stead Using the touch panel keys Music d m
266. perations refer to nserting and ejecting a disc on this page SD card slot gt For more detailed information refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on the next page m 30 En KD Basic operation Adjusting the LCD panel angle A WARNING When opening closing and adjusting the angle of the LCD panel be careful not to get your finger caught A CAUTION Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands by force This may cause malfunction 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The Monitor Setup screen appears il Monitor Setup Nactinatian Dhana S Open SD Insert 2 Touch H or j to adjust the angle 3 Touch K O The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be memorized and the LCD panel will automa tically return to that angle the next time the LCD panel is opened or closed Inserting and ejecting a disc Ad warnine e When opening closing and adjusting the angle of the LCD panel be careful not to get your finger caught e Do not use with the LCD panel left open If LCD panel is left open it may result in injury in the event of an accident A CAUTION e Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands by force This may cause malfunction Chapter Basic operation 02 e Do not operate this navigation system until the LCD panel completely opens or closes If this navigation system is operated while the LCD panel is opening or closing the LCD panel may stop at that an
267. rage areas are subject to change Not all content is available in all cover age areas 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights re served Microsoft MSN and the MSN logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of compa nies Notice about MSN Direct Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of the MSN Direct content The MSN Direct con tent may not be current or available at times and is subject to change without notice Activating the service You have to activate MSN Direct first A web connected computer is required for the online subscription tion please call toll free 1 866 658 7032 68 En g If you have difficulty for the online subscrip General flow chart Check your product key You have to know your product key for the subscription Refer to Checking your product key on this page 4 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct service using your PC Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser vice on the next page 4 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro duct Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function on the next page 4 Activation is complete Checking your product key The product key that you can find here is used in the online subscription 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct The MSN Direct screen appears 2 Touch Status 3 Write your product key down in th
268. rake Using AV1 You can display video image output by the Hide the touch panel keys equipment connected to AV1 Input Touching Hide hides the touch panel keys Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to 1 Touch AV1 Input on the AV System display the touch panel keys again Settings menu gt For details refer to Setting video input 7 AV1 on page 162 2 Touch AV1 on the AV Source menu The image is displayed on the screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 Using AV2 You can display video image output by the equipment connected to AV2 Input 1 Touch AV2 Input on the AV System Settings menu gt For details refer to Setting video input 2 AV2 on page 162 2 Touch AV2 on the AV Source menu The image is displayed on the screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 158 En Chapter Using the external unit EXT1 EXT2 30 The term external unit refers to future Pioneer devices that are not currently planned a USB F001 for or to devices that allow control of basic functions although they are not fully con trolled by the navigation system Two external units can be controlled by this navigation sys tem When two external units are connected the navigation system allocates them as exter nal unit 1 or external unit 2 For details of
269. rather than a work that uses the library The executable is there fore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Sec tion 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Li brary itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Li brary to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice pro vided that th
270. reated for each source Custom2 Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate If you select this curve the effect is reflected all AV source Chapter Customizing preferences 32 1 Touch EQ on the AV Sound Settings menu 13 36 EQ Menu Dvp v Powerful S Bass Natural Vocal Flat Customi Custom2 Nuance Customize gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch the equalizer you want Adjusting the preset equalizer curve effect You can adjust the effect of the preset equali zer Curves The following equalizer curves can be ad justed e Super Bass e Powerful e Natural e Vocal 1 Touch EQ on the AV Sound Settings menu gt For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch the equalizer you want 3 Touch or next to Nuance The level can be adjusted in the range of 6 to 6 If Natural is selected the level can be ad justed in the range of 4 to 6 Adjusting the equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired Adjustments can be made with a 7 band graphic equalizer The difference between Custom1 and Custom2 e A separate Custom curve can be created for each source If you make adjustments when a curve Super Bass Powerful Natural Vocal Flat or Custom is se lected the equalizer curv
271. ree that you will not re export the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer nor the direct product thereof except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic tion in which you obtained the Software 5 TERMINATION This Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software The Agreement also will termi nate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement Upon such ter mination you agree to destroy the Software 6 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS If the Software is being acquired by or on be half of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government the Data is licensed with Limited Rights Utilization of the Software is subject to the restrictions specified in the Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252 221 1013 or the equivalent clause for non defense agencies Pioneer Electronics USA Inc 2265 East 220th Street Long Beach CA 90810 7 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agreement This Agreement shall be gov erned by and construed in accordance with the internal l
272. reversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or execut able form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provid ed that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent ac cess to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by be ing compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library
273. revious title 3 Change the subtitle Multi subtitle Each touch of S Title switches between the subtitle languages Fast reverse or forward Touch lt or gt gt to perform fast reverse or forward If you touch and hold lt lt or gt gt for five seconds fast reverse fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys To re sume playback at a desired point touch P E lt or gt gt Opposite to key pushed for five seconds 5 Frame by frame playback or slow motion playback gt For details refer to frame by frame play back on the next page gt For details refer to Slow motion playback on the next page Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time 124 En Ft Playing a DVD VR disc gt For details refer to Searching for a speci fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on this page Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for the scene you want by spe cifying a title or a chapter and the time O Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch Search and then touch Title title Chapter chapter Time time Title Search DVD VR erates 5 Title Chapter Time 2 Touch the keys to input the target num ber or time and then touch Enter For titles chapters e o select 3 touch 3 and Enter
274. rian bg 0207 Bihari bh 0208 Bislama bi 0209 Bengali Bangla bn 0214 Tibetan bo 0215 Breton br 0218 Catalan ca 0301 Corsican co 0315 Czech cs 0319 Welsh cy 0325 Danish da 0401 Bhutani dz 0426 Esperanto eo 0515 Estonian et 0520 Basque eu 0521 Persian fa 0601 Finnish fi 0609 Fiji fj 0610 Faroese fo 0615 Frisian fy 0625 Irish ga 0701 Scottish Gaelic gd 0704 Galician gl 0712 Language code input code Guarani gn 0714 Gujarati gu 0721 Hausa ha 0801 Hindi hi 0809 Croatian hr 0818 Hungarian hu 0821 Armenian hy 0825 Interlingua ia 0901 Interlingue ie 0905 Inupiak ik 0911 Indonesian in 0914 Icelandic is 0919 Hebrew iw 0923 Yiddish ji 1009 Javanese jw 1023 Georgian ka 1101 Kazakh kk 1111 Greenlandic kl 1112 Cambodian km 1113 Kannada kn 1114 Kashmiri ks 1119 Kurdish ku 1121 Kirghiz ky 1125 Latin la 1201 Lingala In 1214 Laotian lo 1215 Lithuanian It 1220 Latvian Lettish lv 1222 Malagasy mg 1307 Maori mi 1309 Macedonian mk 1311 alayalam ml 1312 ongolian mn 1314 oldavian mo 1315 arathi mr 1318 alay ms 1319 altese mt 1320 Burmese my 1325 Nauru na 1401 Nepali ne 1405 Norwegian no 1415 Occitan oc 1503 Oromo om 1513 Oriya or 1518 Panjabi pa 1601 Polish pl 1612 M M M M M M Language code input code
275. rms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary Gen eral Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Pub lic License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be use ful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser Gen eral Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a pro grammer or your school if any to sign a copyright dis claimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample al
276. round a specified city 1 Display the POI Search screen 2 Touch Around City The Enter City Name screen appears State code key 3 Touch the state code key and touch the desired state province or territory on the list If the location that you want to search for is in another state province or territory this changes the area setting Touch Country to display the country list If the destination is in another country this changes the country setting 4 Enter the city name and then touch OK The Select City screen appears 5 Touch the desired city name The POI List screen appears Touch E The representative location of the city appears on the map screen 6 Touch the category you want POI s are divided into several categories 7 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the map screen Selecting destination from Favorites Storing locations you visit frequently saves time and effort Selecting an item from the list provides an easy way to specify the position This function is not available when there is no registered location in Favorites UO1 LI0 e Hul Da 9S pue 10 Hurydieas en 61 Chapter KD Searching for and selecting a location gt For details refer to Registering a location into Favorites on page 64 1 The Destination Menu screen ap pears 2 Touch Favorites The Favorites screen app
277. rt complete message is displayed and the Contacts List screen appears O It may take time depending on how many entries will be transferred Touch Yes Repeat the steps to transfer more data Changing the phone settings To set the Bluetooth Settings display the Bluetooth Settings screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears buluoud 39 1j3 spuey buisn 3 Touch Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth Settings screen appears Editing the device name You can change the device name to be dis played on your cellular phone Default is PIONEER NAVI 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Device Name The keyboard to enter the name appears 3 Touch to delete the current name and enter the new name by using the key board fl Device Name Name 4 Touch OK The name is changed O Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de vice name Editing the password You can change the password to be used for authentication on your cellular phone De fault is 1111 O Four to eight characters can be entered for a password 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Password The Set Password screen appears 3 Touch any key to enter the password you want to set and then touch OK 90 En ED Using hands free phoninc Stopping Bluetooth wave tra
278. s 1984 2008 by Tele Atlas ALL RIGHTS RE SERVED For purpose of any public disclosure provision under any federal state or local law it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commercial product and not sub ject to disclosure If you are an agency department or other en tity of any State government the United States Government or any other public entity or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government then you hereby agree to protect the Data from public disclosure and to consid er the Data exempt from any statute law regu lation or code including any Sunshine Act Public Records Act Freedom of Information Act or equivalent which permits public ac cess and or reproduction or use of the Data In the event that such exemption is challenged under any such laws this Agreement shall be considered breached and any and all right to retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be terminated and considered immediately null and void Any copies of the Data held by you shall immediately be destroyed If any court of competent jurisdiction considers this clause void and unenforceable in whole or in part for any reason this Agreement shall be con sidered terminated and null and void in its en tirety and any and all copies of the Data shall immediately be destroyed 8 Additional Provisions with respect to POI Data only a No Creation of Mailing Lists You are prohibited from using the
279. s tem Settings menu on this page Each touch of AV1 Input changes the set ting as follows e iPod iPod connected with the USB Inter face cable for iPod CD IU50V e Video External video component e Off No video component is connected O Use AV1 Input when connecting CD RM10 sold separately through the external video component 162 En E Customizing preferences Setting video input 2 AV2 You can switch this setting according to the connected component O This setting applies to RCA inputs AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT on the back of the system Touch AV2 Input on the AV System Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sys tem Settings menu on this page Each touch of AV2 Input changes the set ting as follows e Off No video component is connected e EXT Pioneer external unit connected with the RCA video cable e Video External video component Switching the auto antenna setting If the blue lead of the navigation system is connected to the antenna control terminal of the vehicle select either of the following set tings e Power Ihe antenna extends or turns on when the ignition switch is turned on The antenna is stored or turned off when the ignition switch is turned off e Radio The antenna extends or turns on only when the audio source is FM or AM The antenna is stored or turned off when the AV source is switched to another source Tou
280. s icc GPS positioning is disabled if signals can not be received from more than two GPS satellites In some driving conditions signals trom GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle In this case it is impossible for the system to use GPS positioning Under elevated roads or similar structures In tunnels or en closed parking garages When driving When driving through among high build a dense forest or tall ings trees If a car phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS antenna GPS reception may be lost temporarily Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or car wax because this may block the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals so keep the antenna clear If a GPS signal has not been received for a long time your vehicle s actual position and the current position mark on the map may diverge considerably or may not be up dated In such case once GPS reception is restored accuracy will be recovered xipusddy Appendix gt Appendix Conditions likely to cause e If you drive in zigzags noticeable positioning errors For various reasons such as the state of the road you are traveling on and the reception status of the GPS signal the actual position of your vehicle may differ from the position dis played on the map screen e If you make a shallow turn e tthe road has a series of hairpin bends A ecococooooooo e fthere isa paralle
281. s Price Per Unit 4 Enter the following settings e Distance Enter the distance traveled since the pre vious fueling O The distance is entered automatically only when the distance traveled since the previous fueling is recorded e Gas Pumped Enter the amount of fuel pumped e Gas Price Per Unit Enter the fuel unit price When all the items are entered the fuel con sumption is displayed next to Gas Mileage il Gas Price Calculation Distance Gas Pumped Gas Price Per Unit 5 Touch OK The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears Exporting the data of Gas Mileage Management Exporting the Gas Mileage Management data to an SD memory card is possible O The data stored in this navigation system will be cleared as exporting it to the SD memory card C1 If there is previous data in the SD memory card the data is overwritten with new data when current data is exported 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Navi Settings screen 3 Touch Gas Mileage The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears il Gas Mileage Setting Surface Road Gas Mileage Freeway Gas Mileage Gas Price Per Unit Gas Price Calculation Gas Unit Currency Export 4 Touch Export After a message confirming whether to export the data appeared exporting the data
282. s after ten sec onds Setting the automatic rejection function If this function is on the navigation system automatically rejects all incoming calls 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Refuse All Calls Touching Refuse All Calls switches between On and Off O If both Refuse All Calls and Auto An swer Preference are activated Refuse All Calls takes priority and all incoming calls are automatically rejected O lf Refuse All Calls is set to On rejected incoming calls will not be stored in the missed call list Clearing memory You can clear the memory of each item that corresponds to the connected cellular phone phone book dialed received missed call his tory list and preset dials 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 2 Touch Clear Memory The Clear Memory screen appears i Clear Memory Contacts Received Calls List Dialed Calls List Missed Calls List Clear All On this screen you can select the following items e Contacts You can clear the registered phone book e Received Calls List You can clear the received call history list e Dialed Calls List You can clear the dialed call history list e Missed Calls List You can clear the missed call history list Touch Clear All It clears all the data that correspond to the con nected cellular phone 3 Touch Yes Data on the selected item is cleared from this nav
283. s ex ceed 1 000 the extra entries will not be transferred If more than one number is re gistered for one person such as work place and home each number may be counted separately O Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num bers O Depending on the cellular phone that is connected to this navigation system via Bluetooth technology this navigation sys tem may not be able to display the phone book correctly Some characters may be garbled 1 Ifthe phone book in the cellular phone con tains image data the phone book may not be correctly transferred O The transferred data cannot be edited on the navigation system 1 Connect the cellular phone that has the phone book to transfer gt For details refer to Connecting a registered Bluetooth device on page 82 2 Touch Contacts Transfer on the Phone Menu screen 3 Check that the following screen is dis played and operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book entries gs Phone Menu my mobile phone Send Business Card by operating mobile phone Cance Received Calls S Vidled Calls MISSCQ CdllS After transferring the data is finished a mes sage asking whether you want to transfer more data appears Phone Menu my mobile phone Read more data Yes No Dialed cans Received Calls Missed Calls S 4 Touch No The transferred data is imported to the naviga tion system When the data is successfully imported an impo
284. s updated to reflect the new situation Touch Qj The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows 341d NSIN UO UOHeUNOjU Buismoig Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct Traffic flow icon and line e Red average speed in this area is slower than 15 mph 24 km h e Yellow average speed in this area is be tween 15 mph to 45 mph 24 km h to 72 km h e Green average speed in this area is faster than 45 mph 72 km h An icon without a line will be displayed Selecting traffic information to display There are different types of traffic information that can be received via the MSN Direct ser vice and you can select which types will be in corporated and displayed on your navigation system 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Traffic Settings The Traffic Settings screen appears 3 Touch Displayed Traffic Information The Traffic Type Settings screen appears gt Traffic Type Settings 7 Traffic Flow Warning Danger Narrow Road Lane Closed Accidents Road Works Slippery Road 76 En 4 Touch the traffic information item to display A check mark appears by the selected traffic information gt Traffic Type Settings y Traffic Flow Warning Danger Narrow Road Lane Closed Accidents Road Works Slippery Road O Touching All None selects or deselects all traffic information Touch
285. s when local seek tuning is on Select an FM band STEREO indicator a Touch Band repeatedly until the desired FM Shows that the frequency selected is being band is displayed FM1 FM2 or FM3 broadcast in stereo O This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference Mer 4 38 87 9 MHz 87 9MHz M lt P CH gt 89 9MHz 98 1MHz 106 1MHz lt Seek gt 107 9MHz Band 94 1MHz Detail Touch Preset or Detail Each touch of Preset or Detail changes the detailed information display or preset list display Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall also with the touch of a key 87 9MHz 89 9MHz 98 1MHz lt lt Seek gt 106 1MHz 107 9MHz Band 94 1MHz Detail Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory touch and hold a preset tuning key P1 to P6 until the pre set number e g P C 1 appears The selected radio station has been stored in memory O Upto 18 FM stations six for each of the three FM bands as well as six AM stations can be stored in memory 106 En ED Using the rad
286. sage confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes Dials the office phone number of the entry 3 Call lt entry s name gt other gt Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes Dials the other phone number of the entry 3 Call lt phone number gt Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes gt Dials the phone number Make a call gt Say the phone number you want to call gt Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes The system starts dialing to the number Make a call gt Say the name of entry stored on Contacts you want to call Displays the message confirming whether to dial gt Say Yes The system starts dialing to the number 2 List outgoing calls gt Display the list of recent outgoing calls Dialed Calls to select the number and call 4 List recent calls gt Incoming calls gt Display the list of recently received calls Received Calls to select the num ber and call 4 List recent calls gt Outgoing calls gt Display the list of recent outgoing calls Dialed Calls to select the number and call 4 List recent incoming calls gt Display the list of recently received calls Received Calls to select the number and call 4 SIIOA YIM Wia SAs UOI EHIAeN ANOA Burzesado 2 If the entry has multiple phone number data selection list may appear In such case say the type of phone number 3 If
287. screen can scratch easily Liquid crystal display LCD screen e fthe LCD screen is near the vent of an air conditioner make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it Heat trom the heater may break the LCD screen and cool air from the cooler may cause moist ure to form inside the navigation unit re sulting in possible damage e Small black dots or white dots bright dots may appear on the LCD screen These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a malfunction e The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight e When using acellular phone keep the an tenna of the cellular phone away from the LCD screen to prevent disruption of the video in the form of disturbances such as spots or colored stripes Maintaining the LCD screen e When removing dust trom the LCD screen or cleaning it first turn the system power off then wipe with a soft dry cloth e When wiping the LCD screen take care not to scratch the surface Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners LED light emitting diode backlight A light emitting diode is used inside the dis play to illuminate the LCD screen e At low temperatures using the LED back light may increase image lag and degrade the image quality because of the character istics of the LCD screen Image quality will improve with an increase in temperature x pu ddy en 205 Appendix MD Append SSSC
288. sement parks Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased Playback of a DVD is not pos sible unless it features the same region num ber as the DVD player Route setting The process of determining the ideal route to a specific location route setting is done auto matically by the system when you specify a destination Set route The route marked out by the system to your destination It is highlighted in bright color on the map Title DVD Video or DVD VR discs have a high data capacity enabling recording of multiple videos on a single disc If for example one disc con tains three separate videos they are divided into title 1 title 2 and title 3 This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func tions Appendix Appendix OGG Track log Your navigation system logs routes that you al ready passed through if the track logger is ac tivated This recorded route is called a track log It is handy when you want to check a route traveled or if returning along a complex route VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate Generally speaking CBR constant bit rate is more widely used But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres sion it is possible to achieve compression priority sound quality Voice guidance The giving of directions by navigation voice while in guidance Waypoint A lo
289. service the touch panel keys for dialing vice are Inactive The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process phone and the navigation system cannot be established now If the screen becomes frozen Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine Turn the ignition key back to Acc off Then start the engine again and turn the power to the navigation system back on xipusddy Appendix MD Appendx SSC C 73 gt PTTSTS Messages and how to react to them The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system Refer to the table below to identify the problem then take the suggested corrective action There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here In such a case follow the instructions given on the display Messages and how to react to them Message Cause Action Reference Route calculation was not Route calculation has failed be e Change the destination possible cause of a malfunction in map data Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes software or hardware sage persists Route calculation not possi The destination is too far Set a destination closer to the starting point ble Destination too far Route calculation not possi The destination is too close Set a destination farther from the starting ble Destination too close point Route calculation not possi The destination waypoint s or e Set a destination and
290. service 68 Checking your product key 68 Subscribing to the MSN Direct service 69 Activating the MSN Direct Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices 79 Searching for a specified Bluetooth device 80 Pairing from your Bluetooth devices 81 Deleting a registered device 82 Connecting a registered Bluetooth device 82 12 Using hands free phoning Displaying the Phone Menu 84 Making a phone call 84 function 69 Browsing gas prices 69 Browsing movie times 70 Searching for a theater by selecting a movie title 70 Searching for a movie title by selecting atheater 71 Browsing weather information 71 Checking the local weather information 71 Checking worldwide weather conditions 72 Using traffic information 72 Viewing the traffic event 72 Checking traffic information on the route 73 How to read traffic information on the map 73 Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic congestion 74 Viewing the traffic flow 75 Selecting traffic information to display 76 Browsing local events 76 Browsing news headlines 77 Browsing stock quotes 78 Selecting stock symbols 78 Viewing the detailed stock quotes 78 D Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device Preparing communication devices 79 Registering your Bluetooth devices 79 C4 en Direct dialing 84 Making a call home easily 85 Calling a number in the Contacts List 85 Making a phone call us
291. sing DualDisc with this navigation system e Please refer to the manufacturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs Dolby Digital AVIC Z110BT will down mix Dolby Digital sig nals internally and the sound will be output in stereo Equipped with optical output for fu ture extension O Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories x DOLBY DIGITAL DTS sound DTS audio format cannot be output so select an audio track other than DTS audio format DTS is registered trademarks of DTS Inc J 196 En Detailed information for playable media Compatibility Common notes about disc compatibility e Certain functions of this product may not be available for some discs e Compatibility with all discs is not guaran teed e tis not possible to playback DVD ROM DVD RAM discs e Playback of discs may become impossible with direct exposure to sunlight high tem peratures or depending on the storage conditions in the vehicle DVD Video discs e DVD Video discs that have incompatible re gion numbers cannot be played on this DVD drive The region number of the player can be found on this product s chassis DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL Dual Layer discs e Untfinalized discs which have been re corded with the Video format video mode cannot be played back e Discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format V
292. sired street The Enter House Number screen appears 7 Enter the house number and then touch OK The House Number Selection screen ap pears 58 En 8 Touch the desired house number range The searched location appears on the map screen Finding the location by specifying the house number O Depending on the search results some steps may be skipped 1 Display the Address Search screen 2 Touch House The Enter House Number screen appears 3 Enter the house number and then touch OK The Enter Street Name screen appears Street Enter Street Name 4 Enter the street name and then touch OK The Street Selection screen appears 5 Touch the desired street The Enter City Name screen appears Chapter Searching for and selecting a location CH 6 Enter the city name and then touch OK The Select City screen appears 7 Touch the desired city name The House Number Selection screen ap pears Touch g The representative location of the city appears on the map screen 8 Touch the desired house number range The searched location appears on the map screen Searching for a name by entering multiple keywords You can search for a name such as a city name or a street name by entering multiple keywords 1 Up to three keywords can be entered O Enter a space between keywords as you want to enter several ones The result
293. ss filter Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers 1 Touch HPF on the AV Sound Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 2 Touch HPF to select cut off frequency Each time you touch HPF selects cut off fre quencies in the following order Off 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz Adjusting source levels SLA source level adjustment lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra dical changes in volume when switching be tween sources O Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level which remains unchanged 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad just 2 Touch SLA on the AV Sound Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 165 Chapter Customizing preferences 32 3 Touch or to adjust the source vo lume 8dB to 8dB is displayed as the source vo lume is increased or decreased The following AV sources are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically e DVD V and DVD VR e CD ROM DivX e EXT1 and EXT2 e AV1 and AV2 e SD and USB e XM and SIRIUS O The different source volume level can be set between iPod and USB Enhancing bass Bass Booster The Bass Booster enhances bass sounds which can be muted by driving noise
294. stimated time of arrival is an ideal value calculated based on the value set for Speed and the actual driving speed The estimated time of arrival is only a reference value and does not guarantee arrival at that time e Travel time to your destination or waypoint 7 Current time Meaning of guidance flags Destination The checkered flag indicates your destination Waypoint The blue flags indicate your way points Guidance point The next guidance point next turn ing point etc is shown by a yel low flag Displaying the AV information bar You can check the current status on the se lected AV source Touch AV information bar appears E Commercial St Aliso St E Aliso St gt 0 2 mi fion Destination History AVIC Navigation system Touch the AV information bar The AV information bar is retracted Chapter How to use the map 04 Enlarged map of the intersection When Close Up View in the Map Settings screen is On an enlarged map of the inter section appears E Commercial St Aliso St E Aliso St gt For details refer to Setting Close Up View on page 44 Display during freeway driving In certain locations of the freeway lane infor mation is available indicating the recom mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guidance E i GA PE her NJ 495 W While driving on the freeway freeway exit numbers and freeway signs ma
295. t For more detailed information about the items which would be erased refer to Returning the navigation system to the default or factory settings on page 178 m Chapter Basic operation 02 Checking part names and functions This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons uoi es do diseg f LCD screen TRK lt gt button OPEN CLOSE button Press to perform manual seek tuning fast forward reverse and track search controls en 29 gt For more details refer to the descriptions from Chapter 14 to Chapter 30 4 MODE button e Press to switch between the map screen and the AV operation screen e Press to display the map screen while the navigation function screen is dis played e Press and hold to display the Picture Adjustment screen gt For details refer to Operating the pic ture adjustment on page 160 5 HOME button e Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu e Press to switch between the Classic Menu and the Shortcut Menu while the Top Menu is displayed e Press and hold to turn off the screen dis play VOL button Adjusts the AV Audio and Video source vo lume 7 VOICE button Press the VOICE button to activate voice op erations Press and hold the VOICE button to switch the AV source to mute Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play gt For details concerning o
296. t to view in detail Detailed Information Shell 601 BOREN AVE N Fuel Type Regular 4 42 2days ago Price Date Touch E Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 5 Touch OK Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Browsing movie times Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list Switching the screen allows you to see the movie title now showing Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates movie information the information pro vided may not necessarily correspond to actual movie information Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 It may take up to six hours for all the data to become available under the following condi tions When you use MSN Direct for the first time When you have not performed this function previously around the current area After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days Searching for a theater by selecting a movie title 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Movie Times The All Movie Theaters screen appears All Movie Theaters Name Regal Mountlake 9 Theatres 17 7km 18 0km Regal Bella Bottega 11 AMC Loews Woodinville 12 20 7km Regal Parkway Plaza 12 21 0km Regal East Valley 13 21 7km All Movie Titles Refresh 3
297. ter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it 7 Zip Source Notice The software program used in this product contains 7 Zip library 7 Zip contains the software granted permission for the usage under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Pub lic License A copy of appropriate source code is available at customer necessary expense for the distribution Please contact our Customer Support Center to obtain a copy For more information on the GNU Lesser General Pub lic License visit the GNU s website at http www gnu org Portions of the software in this product are copyright 1996 2007 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Licensed under the Free Type Project LICENSE 2006 Jan 27 http www freetype org FTL TXT uoIpnpo u Chapter KD Introduction About the database About the Data for the Map Database Modifications related to roads streets high ways terrain construction and other things before during the development period may not be reflected in this database Inevitably those modifications after that period are not reflected in this database For more details about the map coverage of this navigation system refer to the informa tion on our website It is strictly prohibite
298. that program using a modified ver sion of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the differ ence between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be 18 En distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with applica tion programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included with out limitation in the
299. the AV operation screen is dis played The voice operation screen appears Some commands you can say Find the nearest lt POI category gt Find an address Call lt name gt lt type gt PLAY or Browse the album lt album gt Change source to lt source name gt 0O a You can listen to the brief operating in struction EJ cancels voice operation You can cancel the voice operation feature at any time by saying Cancel After you cancel voice operations the display returns to the screen displayed before the voice op eration screen appeared How to use the voice operation Searching for a location by address In this example you want to search for a loca tion by address and set it as your destination 1 Press the MODE button to display the map screen or the AV operation screen Operatin 2 Press the VOICE button to activate voice operations A list of commands for voice operation ap pears After a message the beep indicates that the system is ready to accept your voice command Say a command after this beep 3 Say I need directions A message prompting you to select a search by address or by POI appears 4 Say Find an address A message prompting the next operation is given 5 Say acommand according to the mes sage displayed on the screen O When the list of candidates with number appears say the number that you want to select When you select the entry next to 1 s
300. the connection method refer to the Installation Manual For details concerning operation refer to the Send a band command external unit s operation manual This section Touch to send a band command to the ex provides information on external unit opera ternal unit tions with the navigation system that differ Operation varies depending on the exter from those described in the external unit s op nal unit connected In some cases the eration manual external unit may not respond O Operation varies depending on the external 2 Send an A Y lt or gt command unit connected In some cases the exter Touch to operate the external unit nal unit may not respond O Operation varies depending on the exter nal unit connected In some cases some functions may not be used until 4 you touch and hold the key Reading the screen 3 Switching between automatic and man ual function You can turn automatic and manual func d ext1 USB tion on or off You can switch between Auto and Manual functions of the external unit connected Initially this function is set to Auto O Operating commands set for Auto and Manual operations vary depending on the external unit connected 4 Send a1 key to 6 key command The external unit can be operated by trans F001 ZLX4 L 1X3 un eus9 x9 y Huisy Source icon mitting the operating commands set to 1 Shows which source has been selected
301. then select the parental level We recommend that you keep a record of your code number in case you forget it The parental lock level is recorded on the disc You can confirm it by looking at the disc package the included literature or the disc itself You cannot use parental lock with discs that do not feature a recorded parental lock level With some discs parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only after which normal playback resumes For details refer to the disc s instructions If you forget the registered code number touch Ka 10 times on the number input screen The registered code number is can celed letting you register a new one m dnjzes XAIG YA GA O2PIA GAG Setting Auto Play When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati cally and start playback trom the first chapter of the first title O This function is available for DVD Video O Some DVDs may not operate properly If this function is not fully operable turn this function off and start playback Chapter HE DVD Video DVD VR DivX setup 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on page 130 2 Touch Auto Play Touching Auto Play switches this setting be tween On and Off When Auto Play is set to On the repeat range is automatically set to Disc Setting the subtitle file for DivX You can select
302. this page 50 En 8 Your navigation system sets the route to your destination and the map of your surroundings appears 9 After releasing the parking brake drive in accordance with navigation guidance Checking the location on the map After searching for the destination the Loca tion confirmation screen appears Scroll This location will be set as your new destination oe Press OK to proceed Touch OK The destination is set and then route calcula tion starts O Ifyou press the MODE button during route calculation the calculation is canceled and the map screen appears Touch Scroll The map display changes to the scroll mode You can fine tune the location in the scroll mode and then you can set the location as your destination or do various operations Touch Waypoint The location is added to the Waypoints List screen O Ifa destination is not set Waypoint is not available m Checking the calculated route After the destination is set route calculation Starts Chapter Setting a route to your destination 06 When the route calculation is completed Route confirmation screen appears Route confirmation screen Multiple Route L Options y 0S Argeles Profile IN M Waypoints Travel time to your destination 2 Distance to the destination 3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination gt For details refer to nputting the fuel
303. tion guidance 164 Acquiring Cataloging iPod music information 164 Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 165 The AV Sound Settings menu options 165 Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu 165 Using balance adjustment 166 Using the equalizer 166 Adjusting loudness 168 Using subwoofer output 168 Using the high pass filter 168 Adjusting source levels 168 Enhancing bass Bass Booster 169 Setting the simulated sound stage 169 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving 170 Basics of Voice Operation 170 Flow of voice operation 170 Starting voice operation 170 How to use the voice operation 170 Available Basic Voice Commands 172 Basic commands 172 Voice operation forthe iPod 172 Voice operation for AV source other than iPod 174 en C7 Voice commands related to hands free phoning 175 Tips for Voice Operation 176 D Other functions Setting the anti theft function 177 Setting the password 177 Entering the password 177 Deleting the password 177 Forgotten password 177 Restoring the default setting 178 Returning the navigation system to the initial state 178 Returning the navigation system to the default or factory settings 178 Setting items to be deleted 179 Appendix Troubleshooting 181 Messages and how to react to them 186 Messages for audio functions 188 Positioning technology 1
304. tion system park your vehicle to O The navigation features of your navigation safe place and turn the ignition switch off system and rear view camera option if pur ACC OFF immediately and consult your deal chased are intended solely as an aid to er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service you in the operation of your vehicle It is Station Do not use the navigation system in not a substitute for your attentiveness this condition because doing so may result in judgment and care when driving a fire electric shock or other failure J Do not operate this navigation system or e If you notice smoke a strange noise or odor the rear view camera option if purchased if from the navigation system or any other ab doing so will divert your attention In any normal signs on the LCD screen turn off the way trom the sate operation of your vehicle power immediately and consult your dealer or Always observe safe driving rules and fol the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta low all existing traffic regulations If you ex tion Using this navigation system in this con perience difficulty in operating the system dition may result in permanent damage to the or reading the display park your vehicle in system a safe location and apply the parking brake e Do not disassemble or modify this navigation before making the necessary adjustments system as there are high voltage components O Never allow others to use the system un inside which may cause an ele
305. tions are necessary when handling your discs Appendix Appendix OS Built in drive and care e Despite our careful design of the product small scratches that do not affect actual operation may appear on the disc surface as a result of mechanical wear ambient e Use only conventional fully circular discs Do not use shaped discs S D conditions for use or handling of the disc This is not a sign of the malfunction of this D i NS OP product Consider it to be normal wear and y NY tear e Do not use cracked chipped warped or otherwise damaged discs as they may da mage the built in drive Playable discs r touch the recorded surface of the DVD Video and CD DVD and CD discs that display the logos shown below generally can be played on this built in DVD drive e Store discs in their cases when not in use e Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir onments including under direct sunlight e Do not attach labels write on or apply che DVD Video micals to the surface of the discs e o clean a disc wipe it with a soft cloth DVD moving outward from the center Eee gt xe me CD D 2 COMPACT x COMPACT e Condensation may temporarily impair the Sle a built in drive s performance Leave it to ad A just to the warmer temperature for about one hour Also wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth O BD is a trademark of DVD Format Logo e Playback of discs may not be possible be Licensing C
306. to Selecting the songs tions assigned to preset tuning keys to alert on the next page Preset 1 to Preset 6 in the detailed infor mation display during ALL CH MODE Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to a memorized traffic channel by directly calling it up with the Traffic Only one station can be memorized Using My Mix function The MyMix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re ceived When a track that matches the memor ized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you Memorizing an traffic channel are listening to you will be alerted and you can switch the station to listen to that song 1 Tune in to a traffic channel O The track itself is NOT downloaded only 2 Touch and hold Traffic for two sec the song title and the artist name are mem onds or more orized The traffic channel will be memorized O Even if you use this with the XM satellite di gital tuner only one station can be memor ized The station memorized afterward will overwrite the existing one O The channels 000 can not be memorized Memorizing the song The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized Touch and hold Memo The song title and artist name of the song you Tuning in to the memorized channel are listening to are memorized and Song and artist have been saved is dis To
307. to search for an alter native route After touching Diversion the route is recal culated taking all traffic congestion on your Current route into account Chapter Browsing information on MSN Direct dH O Diversion will be enable only when the system can find traffic congestion O Notification icon shows the nearest traffic information on the route However if you touch Diversion the route is recalculated by taking into account not only this infor mation but also all traffic congestion infor mation on the route For the subsequent operations see Checking for traffic congestion automatically gt For details refer to Checking for traffic con gestion automatically on the previous page m Touch List The Traffic On Route screen appears Touch Kl The message disappears and the map display re appears Viewing the traffic flow Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in the form of a list This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred their lo cation and their distance from your current po sition Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates traffic information the information pro vided may not necessarily correspond to actual traffic conditions Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch Traffic Flow A list with traffic flow information
308. to set correct information about the local time may result in the navigation sys tem providing improper routing and gui dance instructions O Never set the volume of your navigation system so high that you cannot hear out side traffic and emergency vehicles O To promote safety certain functions are dis abled unless the vehicle is stopped and or the parking brake is applied O The data encoded in the built in memory is the intellectual property of the provider and the provider is responsible for such con tent O Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety informa tion O Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care fully O Do not install this navigation system where it may i obstruct the driver s vision ii im pair the performance of any of the vehicle s operating systems or safety features in cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or iii impair the driver s ability to safely oper ate the vehicle O Please remember to fasten your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled C Never use headphones while driving GOOG 411 service Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the accuracy of the information Pioneer does not bear responsibility for changes to information services provided by related com
309. to the SD memory card starts The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears when it is done Recording your travel history Activating the track logger enables you to re cord your driving history called track log below You can review the travel history later O Ifan SD memory card is inserted into the SD card slot the track logs will be stored in the SD memory card 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot gt For more details of the operation refer to n serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 31 2 Display the Navi Settings screen 3 Touch Drive Log Settings The Drive Log Settings screen appears 4 Touch Drive Log Settings Each time you touch the key changes that set ting saduasajaid Hulziwio sn gt En 97 e On You can export your track log to the SD memory card e Off default You cannot export your track log to the SD memory card Touch Type Each time you touch the key changes that set ting Private default Set the track log attribute to Private e Business Set the track log attribute to Business e Other Set the track log attribute to Other O While the setting is On the navigation system continues to store the track logs in the inserted SD memory card Using the demonstration guidance This is a demonstration function for retail stores After a route is set touching this key starts the simulation of route
310. tooth audio player e Audio Connects the device as Bluetooth audio player e Handsfree Connects the device as the hands free phone Connection starts When a connection is successfully estab lished a connection complete message ap pears the screen returns to the map screen by touching OK O To cancel the connection to your device touch Cancel 1 The selected device is set for priority con necting O If connection fails check whether your de vice is waiting for a connection and then re try JIA P Y OO aN g 4 6ul DUUOD pue Hulsa sIbay A CAUTION For your safety avoid talking on the phone as much as possible while driving If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech nology this navigation system can be con nected to your cellular phone wirelessly Using this hands free function you can operate the navigation system to make or receive phone calls You can also transfer the phone book data stored in your cellular phone to the navi gation system This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation system For details about the connectivity with the de vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology refer to the information on our website Displaying the Phone Menu Use the Phone Menu if you connect the cel lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza tion gt For more detai
311. tory saves 30 calls per re 4 Touch fm to end the call gistered cellular phone If the number of calls exceeds 30 the oldest entry will be deleted Making a phone call using the 1 Display the Phone Menu screen dialed number history 2 Touch Missed Calls The dialed number history saves 30 calls per The Missed Calls List screen appears registered cellular phone If the entries exceed 30 the oldest one will be deleted a Ne Se 1 1 Nancy 12 18 12 29 2008 Detail 1 Display the Phone Menu screen 2 Touch Dialed Calls The Dialed Calls List screen appears s Dialed Calls List 1 1 Nancy 12 18 12 29 2008 Detail 3 Touch an entry on the list Dialing starts O To cancel the call after the system starts dialing touch fm Touch Detail The Detailed Information screen appears 3 Touch an entry on the list Dialing starts O To cancel the call after the system starts dialing touch fm Touch Detail The Detailed Information screen appears 86 En Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Detailed Information Nancy 01234567890 You can check the details of the party before mak ing a phone call 4 Touch f to end the call Dialing GOOG 411 A CAUTION Local and or long distance charges for making a phone call may apply You can dial GOOG 411 to dial the free busi ness listing service of Google with one touch 1 Touch GOOG 411 on the Phon
312. tradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and dis tribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncom bined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or dis tribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automati cally terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you p
313. tton to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch Navi Settings The Navi Settings menu appears il Navi Settings 3D Sekeni Calibration Status Status Drive Log Gas Mileage Settings Modify Current Location Demo Mode Set Home Checking the connections of leads Check that leads are properly connected be tween the navigation system and the vehicle Please also check whether they are connected in the correct positions 1 Display the Navi Settings screen 2 Touch Connection Status The GPS Status screen appears il GPS Status B Speed Pulse x TE g GPS ANT g Parking Brake g Power Voltage Illumination O a QOLOE Back Signal 1 Speed Pulse The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi gation system is shown 0 is shown while the vehicle is stationary GPS ANT En Indicates the connection status of the GPS antenna the reception sensitivity and trom how many satellites the signal is received Signal com Used in posi munication tioning Orange Yes Yes Yellow Yes No 1 When the GPS antenna is connected to this navigation system OK is dis played When the GPS antenna is not con nected to this navigation system NOK is displayed O If reception is poor please change the installation position of the GPS antenna 3 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied On
314. uch Start to turn BSM on BSM begins to flash While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength When this is complete BSM stops flashing To cancel the storage process touch Stop I Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved by using P1 to P6 Switching the seek mode You can select the method of seek tuning Touch Seek to select the desired set ting e All Seeks stations from both analog and digital broadcasting e HD Seeks from digital broadcasting only O If you select HD on this setting while Blending is set to Analog the setting on Blending turns to D A Auto automa tically Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune In only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception 1 Touch On to turn local seek tuning on To turn local seek tuning off touch Off 112 En 2 Touch lt Prev or Next gt to set the sen sitivity There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM FM 1 2 3 4 AM 1 2 O The FM 4 AM 2 setting allows recep tion of only the strongest stations while lower settings let you receive weaker sta tions Switching the reception mode If a digital broadcast reception condition gets poor the t
315. uch Traffic played You can also perform this operation by O Upto 10song titles and artist names can be touching Traffic on the AV Source memorized Menu O To cancel a traffic announcement touch TRFC Off en 155 Chapter 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner Using the Instant Replay function The Instant Replay function allows you to replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN TERFACE capable for this function As soon as you tune to a channel Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE automatically begins storing the broadcast It can store approximately up to 44 minutes previous depending on the selected channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE 1 Touch Instant Replay on the SIRIUS screen to activate the Instant Replay mode 2 Touch keys for Instant Replay Return to the start of the current song or program Touching again el will skip back to the previous song or program lt lt and hold Fast reverses ee Forwards play to the next song or program gt gt and hold Fast forwards wai Touching gt H switches between playback and pause During Instant Replay mode each touch of Disp changes the display information as follows Time position Channel number Chan nel name Channel category Artist name feature Song program title Composer O You cannot replay the broadcast prior
316. uch the desired event to display de tailed information of the event Detailed Information SEATTLE SOUNDERS VS HOLLYWOOD UNITED Qwest Field amp Event Center 800 Occidental Ave S Tue 6 24 20 00 206 381 7555 Info 10 13 S Spectator Soccer Touch g Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Touch Refresh The information is updated O Refresh appears when the new informa tion is received 8 Touch OK Location confirmation screen appears gt For details refer to Checking the location on the map on page 50 Touch Call Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re quired Browsing news headlines Recent news headlines are displayed in a list Although the MSN Direct service regularly up dates news headlines the information pro vided may not necessarily correspond to current news headlines Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 68 1 Touch Destination on the Top Menu and then touch MSN Direct 2 Touch News Jobless rate is expected to jump to 7 9 percent 3 Touch the desired news headline Further details about the news are displayed 341d NSIN UO UOHeUNOjU Bulsmoig Chapter ED Browsing information on MSN Direct Detailed Information U S regulators to
317. uching Traffic on the AV Source songs on the next page menu O You can even call up a Instant Traffic amp When the memorized song is broadcast Weather channel from a source other than A beep sounds and a message is displayed the XM source Touch Yes to switch to that station and listen To cancel the announcement touch TRFC to that track Off on the screen O If the memorized song is not checked or when Off is selected on Alert on ii n Memo Edit screen no alert will be pro Using the Function menu Aa cea d 1 Touch XM on the AV Source menu efer to Setting the memorized songs 00 to display the XM screen the next page 7 P gt For details concerning operations refer to Notification may not be provided depend Screen swiiching overview On page 36 ing on the status of the navigation system O If there is even a slight difference between 2 Touch EY the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast no notification will be provided even though they are the same song Memo Edit Jaun INX 34 Buisn XM 1 Function Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to the memorized Instant Traf fic amp Weather channel by directly calling it up a vane Only one station can be memor a Satins thewieiietivedeonas Memorizing an Instant Traffic amp Weather channel 1 Tune into Instant Traffic amp Weather
318. udio Rear Screen Traffic J gi i System Settings AV Settings AV Sound 7 Bluetooth ing Map Se S meee gapang Settings Replicator 5 He 14 02 Verdugo Rd W Avenue 40 Census Tract a 10 00 S nres Artists Albums Podcasts Video 0 2 mi es A Eagle Rock Blvd A 36 En o MENU 01 11 Brilliance i PIONEER TIME AL sound vision soul Shuffle All 00 18 Chapter How to use the navigation menu screens CH What you can do on each menu Top Menu Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu This is the starting menu to access the desired screens and operate the various functions There are two types of the Top Menu LA Destination AV Source Settings Classic Menu Shortcut Shortcut Menu O In this manual Classic Menu will be referred to as Top Menu 2 Destination Menu You can search for your destination on this menu You can also check or cancel your set route from this menu 3 Phone Menu You can access the screen that is related to hands free phoning to see call histories and change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless technology connection 4 AV Source menu You can access the screen for selecting the audio and visual source to play Settings Menu You can access the screen to customize set tings Map screen Press the MODE button to display the naviga tion map screen D AV operation screen This is the s
319. ulations apply they must be obeyed e When applying the parking brake in order to view Video image or to enable other func tions offered by the navigation system park your vehicle in a safe place and keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill or otherwise might move when releasing the parking brake Chapter GE A CAUTION A WARNING Accuracy performance of interlock may be im e SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED S pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection e USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR Q and driving habits or conditions of the place IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA OTHER USE S where the vehicle is parked MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE S gt When you attempt to watch Video image A while driving the warning Viewing of front CAUTION seat video source while driving is strictly e For safety reasons the rear view camera func prohibited will appear on the screen To tion is not available until the navigation sys watch Video image on this display stop the tem boots up completely vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking e The rear view mode is to use the navigation brake Please keep the brake pedal pushed system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers down before releasing the parking brake or while backing up Do not use this function for entertainment purposes When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT Notes Befor
320. uner 28 Storing and recalling broadcast T You cannot memorize a song that does not have song title and artist name information stations CI You cannot memorize the song title or the With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys artist name of channel 000 Preset 1 to Preset 6 you can easily store up T The memorized title may not be displayed to six broadcast stations for later recall also correctly with the touch of a key 1 Select the channel that you want to When the memorized song is broadcast C store in memory A beep sounds and a message is displayed 5 2 Touch Preset to display the preset list Touch Jump to switch to that station and you can listen to that track If you touch gt 3 Keep touching a preset tuning key P1 Stay the channel does not switch D to P6 O If the alert for the song is Off or set The selected station has been stored in mem Alert to Off no notification will be pro a Ory vided even when that song is broadcast r The next time you touch the same preset tun gt For details refer to Setting the memor e ing key Preset 1 to Preset 6 the station is re ized songs on the next page called from memory Notification may not be provided depend T Up to 18 stations six for each of three SIR ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys IUS bands can be stored in memory tem T You can also touch lt or gt to recall sta gt For details refer
321. uner automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same frequency level in default If you want to prevent a frequent automatic switching switch this setting to Analog Touch Blending to switch the recep tion mode e Analog Receives analog broadcasting only e D A Auto Automatically switches to the analog broad cast of the same frequency level as the digi tal broadcast O Ifyou select Analog on this setting while Seek is set to HD the setting on Seek turns to All automatically m Chapter Playing audio CDs You can play anormal music CD using the built in drive of the navigation system This section describes how 1 Insert the disc you want to play into disc loading slot Playback starts from the first track of the CD 2 Touch Disc on the AV Source menu to display the CD screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the disc Reading the screen OO oO Disc Repeat Media ma MOO A LU 44 II Shuffle All OOO A E ELO List Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track currently play ing 3 Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi cates the current playback condition E Scan play Red Random play fa
322. usic SD audio USB audio Bluetooth Audio XM SIRIUS Digital Radio screen AV1 and iPod Video DVD V DVD VR DivX SD Video and USB Video AV2 Video and EXT1 Video EXT2 Video Rear view camera image Map screen The picture adjustment may not be avail able with some rear view cameras Because of the LCD screen characteristics you may not be able to adjust the screen at low temperatures suoipuny 19410 2 Touch or to adjust the desired item Each touch of or increases or decreases the level of the desired item 3 Touch Sj to return to the previous screen Options on the AV System Settings menu Displaying the AV System Settings menu 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu 2 Touch Settings The Settings Menu screen appears 3 Touch AV Settings The AV System Settings menu appears re AV System Settings DivX AV1 Input AV2 Input ANT CTRL Wide Mode Mute Mute Level Guidance VR Catalog DivX VOD Tel SP Menu S M You can only adjust Wide Mode when se lecting an AV source with video O You can only adjust Rear SP when the AV source is Off Setting video input 1 AV1 You can switch this setting according to the connected component O This setting applies to mini jack input Touch AV1 Input on the AV System Settings menu For details refer to Displaying the AV Sy
323. ust front rear speaker balance Each time you touch A or Y the front rear speaker balance moves towards the front or the rear Front 15 to Rear 15 is displayed as the front rear speaker balance moves from front to rear Setting Front and Rear to 0 is correct when using a two speaker system 3 Touch lt or gt to adjust left right speaker balance Each time you touch lt 4 or gt the left right speaker balance moves towards the left or the right 166 En E Customizing preferences Left 15 to Right 15 is displayed as the left right speaker balance moves from left to right Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as desired Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer curves that you can easily recall at any time Here is a list of the equalizer curves Equalizer curve Super Bass Super Bass is a Curve in which only low pitched sound is boosted Powerful Powerful is a curve in which low pitched and high pitched sounds are boosted Natural Natural is a curve in which low pitched and high pitched sounds are slightly boosted Vocal Vocal is a curve in which the midrange which is the human vocal range is boosted Flat Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted Custom1 Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate A separate custom curve can be c
324. ut the logo for channel name Only the logo data that is contained in the na vigation system can be displayed for each channel The logo of a newly established chan nel that is not contained cannot be displayed When a logo is not available the following substitute icon is displayed Substitute icon O The icon of each broadcast station is con tained in the NAND flash memory based on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of March 2009 O Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta tion in the future may not be supported by the navigation system and may cause the unit to display incorrect icons M Source icon Shows which source has been selected 2 XM band indicator Shows the XM band that has been selected 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected 4 XM channel number indicator Shows the XM channel number the tuner is currently tuned to XM channel category Shows the category of broadcast channel 6 Current time D XM channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected You can select a channel from all channels in ALL CH MODE and select a channel from selected category in CATEGORY MODE XM station name logo O The message ON THE AIR disappears if the navigation system cannot receive XM tuner reception for some reason XM station name indicator Shows the XM broadcast station name the tuner is Current
325. want to delete The registration is canceled Connecting a registered Bluetooth device The navigation system automatically connects the Bluetooth device selected as the target of 82 En connection However connect the Bluetooth device manually in the following cases Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis tered and you want to manually select the device to be used e You want to reconnect a disconnected Bluetooth device e Connection cannot be established automa tically for some reason If you start connection manually carry out the following procedure You can also connect the Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys tem detect it automatically 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices For some Bluetooth devices no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen 3 Touch Connection The Connection List screen appears i Connection List 3 My Phone OO0E7B9AF636 a My Phone 0019874625C5 4 Touch the name of the device that you want to connect The Select Profile screen appears i Select Profile Handsfree and Audio Audio Handsfree Chapter 5 Touch the profile that you want to con nect You can select the following profiles e Handsfree and Audio Connects the device as the hands free phone and the Blue
326. ward when the repeat play range in Track the repeat play range changes to AM 2 Play tracks in a random order Random play lets you playback tracks in random order within the current repeat range n M R Touching Random switches between On Display the Function menu and Off gt For details refer to Using the Function menu on this page 2 Playback and Pause Touching gt or M switches between play back and pause 3 Connect the Bluetooth audio player Touching Connect connects the Bluetooth audio player manually m Using the touch panel keys m My Phone Connect Connect en 147 Chapter You can use the navigation system to contro an XM satellite digital tuner which is sold se parately For details concerning operation refer to the XM tuner s operation manuals This section provides information on XM operations with the navigation system which differs from that described in the XM tuner s operation man ual The following XM satellite digital tuner units cannot be connected GEX P900XM GEX P910XM Reading the screen ALL CH MODE oo E XM 1 Pcl D ALL CH MODE Memo lt Seek gt QF Traffic D Says Thanks Mode List Band Jerry Herman Direct Preset CATEGORY MODE PA oe XM 1 Premi CH 028 CATEGORY MODE Memo lt Seek gt QF Traffic A Says Thanks Mode List Band Jerry Herman Direct Preset En Abo
327. waypoint s on roads ble Navigation cannot be pro starting point are in an area where Reset the destination after you drive the ve vided around destination or no road exists e g a mountain and hicle to any road starting point the route calculation is impossible Route to destination cannot The destination or waypoint s are in Change the destination be calculated an isolated island etc without a ferry and the route calculation is im possible If there is no road con nected to your starting point or destination this message will ap pear Failed to create route profile n rare cases a route calculation e Retry error may occur e Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes sage persists No picture folder Save jpeg Cannot load the image because Use appropriate data and store it correctly file to Pictures folder Pictures folder is not found inthe Page 101 inserted external storage device Pictures folder exists on the SD Use appropriate data and store it correctly memory card but there is no load Page 101 able data in the folder Data Read error Failed to read the data for some rea Use appropriate data and store it correctly son Page 101 The file is corrupt The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly was made to set an image file that Page 101 was not made to specifications as the splash screen 186 En Appendix Appendix OGG Message
328. when AV source is Off Touch Mute Level on the AV System Settings menu Each touch of Mute Level changes the set tings as follows e 20dB The volume becomes 1 10 e 10dB The volume becomes 1 3 e All The volume becomes 0 O When you select All no audio adjust ments are possible during the sound is turned off O When you select 20dB or 10dB no audio adjustments are possible during the sound is attenuated T AV source volume returns to normal when the corresponding action is ended Even when a mute signal has been received from MUTE lead connected to the naviga tion unit navigation voice guidance cannot be attenuated or muted 164 En gt Customizing preferences Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance You can set the speaker to output the naviga tion guidance and phone voice etc Touch Guidance Tel SP on the AV Sys tem Settings menu Each touch of Guidance Tel SP changes the settings as follows e L R SP Uses both the front right and left speakers e Left SP Uses only the front left soeaker e Right SP Uses only the front right speak er Acquiring Cataloging iPod music information If you always set the language other than US English on Voice Language this setting is unnecessary Unless VR Catalog Mode is turned off this navigation system tries to acquire the informa tion needed to operate iPod with voice com
329. where the angle can be switched 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on this page 2 Touch Multi Angle Touching Multi Angle switches between On and Off Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of displays A wide screen display has a width to height ratio TV aspect of 16 9 while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4 3 If you use a regular rear display with a TV aspect of 4 3 you can set the aspect ratio suitable for your rear display We recommend use of this function only when you want to Tit it to the rear display When using a regular display select either Letter Box or Panscan Selecting 16 9 may result in an unnatural picture 1 Display the DVD DivX Setup screen gt For details refer to Displaying DVD DivX Setup Menu on this page Chapter DVD Video DVD VR DivX setup 22 2 Touch TV Aspect Each touch of TV Aspect changes the setting as follows e 16 9 Wide screen picture 16 9 is dis played as it is initial setting e Letter Box The picture is in the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen e Panscan he picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen O When playing discs that do not have a pan scan system the disc is played back with Letter Box even if you select Panscan setting Confirm whether the disc package bears the mar
330. witching the display Desired information can be displayed Touch Disp Touch Disp repeatedly to switch between the following settings Channel name Artist name Song title Program type O Only when the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio station can the display be changed O When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio station default display is changed into station name instead of frequency Touch and hold Disp You can turn the detailed information scroll mode on and off m Using the Function menu 1 Touch Digital Radio on the AV Source menu to display the Digital Radio screen gt For details concerning operations refer to Screen switching overview on page 36 2 Touch EJ FM 1 Function BSM Blending Storing the strongest broadcast fre quencies gt For details refer to the next page 2 Switching the seek mode En u01 d399y 0OIPey GH Chapter 16 HD Radio Reception gt For details refer to this page 3 Tuning in strong signals gt For details refer to this page 4 Switching the reception mode gt For details refer to this page Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory lets you auto matically store the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under the preset tuning keys P1 to P6 and once stored there you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key To
331. y be displayed when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits EXIT 24D Stadium Way Dodge Stadium Lane information 2 Freeway exit information Displays the freeway exit 3 Freeway signs These show the road number and give direc tional information C1 Ifthe data for these items is not contained in the built in memory the information is not available even if there are the signs on the actual road Operating the map screen Changing the scale of the map You can change the map scale between 25 yard and 1 000 miles 25 meters and 2 000 kilo meters 1 Display the map screen 2 Touch on the map screen and B with the map scale appear Y Wist St 3 Touch or E to change the map scale If you do not operate the function for a few seconds the initial map screen automati cally returns Touch the direct scale key to change the map to the selected scale directly Switching the map orientation You can switch the vehicle s direction on the map between Heading up and North up e Heading up dew y asn 0 MOH The map display always shows the vehicle s direction as proceeding toward the top of the screen e North up The map display always has north at the top of the screen O The map orientation is fixed at North up in the following situation When the map scale is 25 miles 60 kilo meters or more O The map orientation is fixed at Heading up in the
332. yed back will be skipped FILE SKIPPED Cannot play back all tracks All the files on the inserted disc are Files that are protected by digital rights management DRM Replace the DVD Video with one bearing the correct region number Replace the disc with one the navigation sys tem can play Page 214 Wait until the unit s temperature returns to within normal operating limits Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On again The protected files are skipped PROCETED DISC secured by DRM Flash writing error Impossible The playback history for VOD con to write on the flash CAN NOT SAVE DATA Authorization Error AUTHOR The device does not match the de IZATION ERROR vice registered with the VOD provi der VOD content cannot be played back son Cannot play back HD file FILE High definition HD DivX video can NOT PLAYABLE HIGH DEF not be played SD USB iPod Message Cause Tracks that cannot be played back will be skipped Files that are protected by digital rights management DRM tents cannot be saved for some rea Replace the disc e Retry e f the message appears frequently consult your dealer Check whether this device has been regis tered with the VOD provider Create playable one and retry Action Reference The protected files are skipped This type of file cannot be played by Replace it with the playable file Page 199 this unit 188 En
333. ying to iPod VR Dictionary updated appears x acquire the information needed to Switch the screen to another screen to can T operate iPod with voice commands cel the acquiring process In such case the from the iPod currently connected acquiring process will resume when the iPod Q basic screen Music is displayed Page 164 as Creating iPod VR dictionary Voice operation is restricted be e Wait on the iPod basic screen Music until Some iPod commands are un cause the navigation system is try iPod VR Dictionary updated appears available during this process ing to acquire the information e Switch the screen to another screen to can needed to operate iPod with voice cel the acquiring process In such case the commands from the iPod currently acquiring process will resume when the iPod connected basic screen Music is displayed Page 164 Appendix MD Append Ss C CSSSC lt 7 Positioning technology Positioning by GPS The Global Positioning System GPS uses a network of satellites orbiting the Earth Each of the satellites which orbit at a height of 21000 km continually broadcasts radio sig nals giving time and position information This ensures that signals from at least three can be picked up trom any open area on the earth s surface The accuracy of the GPS information depends on how good the reception is When the sig nals are strong and reception is good GPS can determi
334. z IHF A net work CD 96 dB 1 kHz IHF A network Appendix Appendix OGG Dynamic range cssecsesssesssesesseees DISTOTION isiin Output level MNCEO aeaiee AUTO ssesetenssiciscrcstovessataieese Number of channels uses MP3 decoding format sss WMA decoding format AAC decoding format wuss DivX decoding format uss USB USB standard Spec wesc Max current SUPPLY uses Max memory capacity sess File SV STONY seseutelestsreetarucutimnstins USB class eee ete ent Decoding format sssrin SD Compatible physical format Max memory capacity wees FIle SYSTEMY anantecchdeceninansssteaaeneesets Decoding format sssrin Bluetooth VerSiOnN scechwiewvdvneiibentavevucans Output pOWEF seca tireaseredartetieant FM tuner Frequency range cssssssssessessesseees Usable sensitivity esssessessesseeees Signal to noise ratio ns DIStTOMION sssssssrunesernrenenuinneersnreeesnns Frequency response nsu Stereo separation seess AM tuner Frequency range nusus Usable sensitivity essesssssessess 95 dB 1 kHz CD 94 dB 1 kHz 0 008 1 kHz 1 0 Vo p 75 Q 0 2 V 1 0 V 1 kHz 0 dB 2 stereo MPEG 1 amp 2 Audio Layer 3 Ver 9 0 L3 MPEG 4 AAC only encoded by iTunes m4a Home Theater Ver 3 11 Ver 4 X Ver 5 X Ver6 X avi divx USB 2 0 High Speed 500 mA 16GB FAT16 FAT32 Mass storage class MP38 WMA AAC WAVE H 264 MPEG4 WMV Version 2 00 16GB FAT16 FAT32 MP3 WMAVAA

Pioneer Z110 Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents